instruction manual machine protection relay gre170 …€¦ · instruction manual. machine...

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MACHINE PROTECTION RELAY

GRE170

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2014 All Rights Reserved.

( Ver. 0.0 )

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Safety Precautions Before using this product, be sure to read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes safety precautions when using the GRE170. Before installing and using the equipment, read and understand this chapter thoroughly.

Explanation of symbols used Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if you do not follow instructions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow instructions.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor injury or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.

• Current transformer circuit Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerous high voltage.

• Exposed terminals Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is dangerous.

• Residual voltage Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

• Fiber optic (option) When connecting this equipment via an optical fiber, do not look directly at the optical signal.

CAUTION

• Earth The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

DANGER

DANGER

WARNING

WARNING

1

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

CAUTION

• Operation conditions The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

• Ratings Before applying AC voltage and current or DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.

• Printed circuit board Do not attach and remove the printed circuit board while the power to the equipment is on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

• External circuit When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the supply voltage used and prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

• Power supply If power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault, event and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.

• Connection cable Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

• Modification Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction, and any such modifications will invalidate the warranty.

• Disposal This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

• Plastics material This product contains the following plastics material.

- Polycarbonate + ABS

2

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Contents 1. Introduction 7

2. Protection Scheme 9 2.1 Overcurrent and Undercurrent protection 10

2.1.1 Directional Phase Fault OC (67/50P, 67/51P) 10 2.1.2 Directional Earth Fault O/C EF (67/50N, 67/51N) 21 2.1.3 Directional Sensitive Earth Fault O/C SEF (67/50N, 67/51N) 27 2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent NOC (46) 32 2.1.5 Phase Undercurrent UC (37P) 35 2.1.6 Circuit Breaker Fail CBF (50BF) 37 2.1.7 Inrush restraint (2f) 40 2.1.8 Voltage controlled O/C (51V) 40

2.2 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 44 2.2.1 Phase Overvoltage OV (59) 44 2.2.2 Phase Undervoltage UV (27) 48 2.2.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage ZOV (59N) 52 2.2.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage NOV (47) 55

2.3 Frequency Protection 58 2.3.1 Under/Overfrequency FRQ (81U/81O) 58 2.3.2 Frequency rate-of-change DFRQ 60

2.4 Trip and Alarm signal output 62 2.4.1 Trip circuit supervision 62 2.4.2 Trip Counter Alarm 64

2.5 Mechanical protection 66 2.5.1 Current differential for machine protection DIF (87) 66 2.5.2 Mechanical Jam (39) 70 2.5.3 Locked rotor (51LR) 71 2.5.4 Reverse Power (32) 74 2.5.5 Loss of field (40G) 77 2.5.6 Start Protection (50S) 78 2.5.7 Thermal Overload Protection 79 2.5.8 Restart Inhibit (66) 81

3. Technical Description 85 3.1 Hardware Description 85 3.2 Input and Output Signals 87

3.2.1 Input Signals 87 3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 87 3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 89 3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 90

3

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.3 Automatic Supervision 91 3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 91 3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing 91 3.3.3 Failure Alarms 92 3.3.4 Trip Blocking 93 3.3.5 Setting 93

3.4 Recording Function 94 3.4.1 Fault Recording 94 3.4.2 Event Recording 95 3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 95

3.5 Metering Function 97

4. User Interface 99 4.1 Outline of User Interface 99

4.1.1 Front Panel 99 4.1.2 Communication Ports 100

4.2 Operation of the User Interface 102 4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 102 4.2.2 Relay Menu 104 4.2.3 Displaying Records 107 4.2.4 Displaying the Status 115 4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 126 4.2.6 Changing the Settings 127 4.2.7 Control 180 4.2.8 Testing 182

4.3 Personal Computer Interface 186 4.4 MODBUS Interface 186 4.6 Clock Function 187 4.7 Special Mode 188

5. Installation 189 5.1 Reciption of Relays 189 5.2 Relay monitoring 189 5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 191 5.4 Handling Precautions 191 5.5 External Connections 191

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 192 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 192 6.2 Cautions 192

6.2.1 Safety Precautions 192 6.2.2 Cautions on Tests 193

6.3 Preparations 193 6.4 Hardware Tests 194

6.4.1 User Interfaces 194

4

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 194 6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 196 6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 197

6.5 Function Test 198 6.5.1 Measuring Element 198 6.5.2 Protection Scheme 205 6.5.3 Metering and Recording 205

6.6 Conjunctive Tests 206 6.6.1 On Load Test 206 6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 207

6.7 Maintenance 208 6.7.1 Regular Testing 208 6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 208 6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules 209 6.7.4 Resumption of Service 209 6.7.5 Storage 209

7. Putting Relay into Service 210

Appendix A 211 Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal Model to

IEC60255-8 and IEC60255-149 211

Appendix B 215

Signal List 215

Appendix C 249

Binary Output Default Setting List 249

Appendix D 251

Details of Relay Menu, LCD & Keypad Operation 251

Appendix E 264

Case Outline 264

Appendix F 266

Typical Application Diagram 266

Appendix G 270

Relay Setting Sheet 270

Appendix H 290

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 290

Appendix I 294

Return Repair Form 294

Appendix J 299

Technical Data 299

5

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix K 306

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 306

Appendix L 309 IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 309

Appendix M 319

Modbus: Interoperability 319

Appendix N 360

Ordering 360

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.0.0)

6

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1. Introduction GRE170 is a relay for mechanical protection such as Async motor or induction motor of the scale in the small or middle, or small capacity generator.

Models 100, 101, 102, 120, 121 and 122 provide three-phase current inputs for the machine protection.

Models 200, 201, 202, 220, 221 and 222 provide three-phase current inputs and three-phase voltage input for directional protection.

Models 300, 301, 302, 320, 321 and 322 provide 2 three-phase current inputs for differential protection and three-phase voltage and zero-phase voltage inputs.

All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and software. External circuits are monitored by trip circuit supervision, CT supervision, and CB condition monitoring features.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided for local connection via a front-mounted USB port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions.

Data available either via the relay HMI or communication ports includes the following functions.

The GRE170 provides the following metering and recording functions.

• Metering

• Fault records

• Event records

• Disturbance records (available via communication ports)

7

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Table 1-1 identifies the functions to be provided by GRE170-_0□A.

Table 1-1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRE170

100 200 300 Current differential protection DIFM (87M) Directional Phase Fault O/C OC(67/50P, 67/51P): 1st stage to 4th stage Directional Earth Fault O/C EF(67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage Directional Sensitive Earth Fault O/C SEF(67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage + + + Phase Undercurrent UC(37P): 1 st and 2 nd stage Thermal Overload (49) Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent NOC(46): 1st and 2nd stage Circuit Breaker Fail CBF(50BF) Phase Overvoltage OV(59): 1st stage to 4th stage Phase Undervoltage UV(27): 1st stage to 4th stage Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage NOV(47): 1st and 2nd stage Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage ZOV(59N): 1st and 2nd stage Under/Overfrequency FRQ(81U/81O): 1st stage to 4th stage Frequency rate-of-change DFRQ: 1st stage to 4th stage Reverse Power(32) Mechanical Jam (39) Voltage controlled O/C (51V) Loss of field (40G) Start Protection (48/50S) Locked Rotor (51LR) Restart Inhibit (66) CT Supervision VT Supervision Trip circuit supervision Self supervision CB State Monitoring Trip Counter Alarm CB Operate Time Alarm Metering Watt meter Fault records Event records Disturbance records MODBUS Communication DNP 3.0 Communication + + + IEC60870-5-103 Communication + + + IEC61850 communication (Optional) + + + ∑Iy Alarm

Note: The model of “□“is 0, 1or 2 for number of BO and BI.

8

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2. Protection Scheme GRE170 provides the following protection schemes with measuring elements in parentheses.

• Current differential protection (DIF)

• Overcurrent and undercurrent protections

• Overvoltage and undervoltage protections

• Frequency protections

• Mechanical protections

The DIFM is provided with DIF and HOC elements for main protection. For details, see Sections 2.5.

They provide motor protection as follows:

DIF: protection for internal faults (The DIF can be blocked by 2f or 5f element.)

HOC: protection for internal faults, specifically for heavy internal faults, high-speed operation (The HOC is not blocked by 2f or 5f element. The sensitivity is set above the estimated maximum inrush current.)

Differential current

HOC

DIF

Small Large

Figure 2-1 shows typical application and the relationship between AC inputs and the measuring elements applied in 300A model.

Mot

or

GRE170

1CT

VT

2CT

DIF

OC NOC CBF OCV THM UC RP LOF

FRQ DFRQ OV UV

ZCT

EF/EF1/SEF

Calculate 3I0

1nCT

ZOV

at SEF model

Figure 2-1 Measuring Elements

9

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.1 Overcurrent and Undercurrent protection

2.1.1 Directional Phase Fault OC (67/50P, 67/51P): 1st stage to 4th stage

2.1.1.1 Non-directional Overcurrent Protection GRE170 provides distribution network protection with four-stage phase fault and earth fault overcurrent elements OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4*, sensitive earth fault elements SEF1 to SEF4, and two-stage negative sequence overcurrent elements NC1 and NC2 which can be enabled or disabled by scheme switch setting. The OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NC1 and NC2 elements have selective inverse time and definite time characteristics. The protection of local and downstream terminals is coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.

The characteristic for the overcurrent elements is as follows:

Figure 2-2 Characteristic of Overcurrent Elements

*In the models 120, 121, 122, 220, 221, 222, 320, 321 and 322, the earth fault current is calculated from three-phase current.

2.1.1.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without being substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides reasonably fast tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults can occur.

The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2-3 for radial networks with several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the download section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.

I 0

Stage 1

Stage 4

Note: NOC provides two stage overcurrent elements.

10

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

TC TC

A B C

Operate time

Figure 2-3 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection

The inverse time overcurrent protection elements have the IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1) in accordance with IEC 60255-151:

( )( )

1

kt G TMS cI

Isα

= × + −

where:

t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),

I = energising current (amperes),

Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),

TMS = time multiplier setting,

K, α, c = constants defining curve.

Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2-1 Specification of IDMT Curves. They are illustrated in Figure 2-4.

Any one curve can be selected for each IDMT element by scheme switch [M∗∗∗C].

Table 2-1 Specification of IDMT Curves

Curve Type (IEC 60255-151) Curve Description k α c tr β

A IEC Normal Inverse (NI) 0.14 0.02 0 - -

B IEC Very Inverse (VI) 13.5 1 0 - -

C IEC Extremely Inverse (EI) 80 2 0 - -

- UK Long Time Inverse (LTI) 120 1 0 - -

D IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85 2

E IEEE Very Inverse (VI) 19.61 2 0.491 21.6 2

F IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI) 28.2 2 0.1217 29.1 2

- US CO8 Inverse 5.95 2 0.18 5.95 2

- US CO2 Short Time Inverse 0.02394 0.02 0.01694 2.261 2

Note: tr and β are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2). In addition to above nine curve types, GRE170 can provide a user configurable IDMT curve. If required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗C] to “C” and set the curve defining

(1)

11

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

constants k, α, c. The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.

Curve defining constants Range Step

k 0.000 – 30.000 0.001

α 0.00 – 5.00 0.01

c 0.000 – 5.000 0.001

tr 0.000 – 30.000 0.001

β 0.00 – 5.00 0.01

IEC/UK Inverse Curves(Time Multiplier = 1)

0.1

1

10

100

1000

1 10 100

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(s)

LTI

NI

VI

EI

IEEE/US Inverse Curves(Time Multiplier = 1)

0.1

1

10

100

1 10 100

Current (Multiple of Setting)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(s)

MI

VI

CO2

CO8

EI

Figure 2-4 IDMT Characteristics

Programmable Reset Characteristics OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NC1 and NC2 have a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time delayed, or dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)

The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.

The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent (‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.

12

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic can be applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Dependent time reset The dependent time resetting characteristic complies with the dependent time reset characteristics described in IEC 60255-151 which are specific only to the IEEE/US operate characteristics, and are defined by the following equation:

( )1

S

trt G RTMSI

Iβ

= × −

(2)

where:

t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),

I = energising current (amperes),

Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),

tr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero (see Table 2-1),

RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.

β = constants defining curve.

Figure 2-5 shows the dependent time reset characteristics.

13

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEEE Reset Curves(Time Multiplier = 1)

1.00

10.00

100.00

1000.00

0.1 1Current (Multiple of Setting)

Tim

e (s

)

MI

VI

EI

CO2

CO8

Figure 2-5 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics

Definite Time Overcurrent Protection In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.

The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring elements and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective protection with graded setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination with the downstream section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2-6. As is clear in the figure, the nearer to the power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section. This is undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.

Operate time

TC

TC

A B C Figure 2-6 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

14

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, additional overcurrent elements provide instantaneous or definite time overcurrent protection.

OC1 to OC4 and EF1 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. (In case of instantaneous operation, the delayed pick-up timer is set to 0.00.) The phase fault elements operate on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.

Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2-7, well-coordinated protection can be achieved with the fuses covering branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for the feeder faults being provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.

Fuse

GRE170

Motor

Figure 2-7 Motor Protection Coordinated with Fuse

Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2-8, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.

Current (amps)

Time (s)

OC2

OC3

Fuse

OC1

Figure 2-8 Staged Definite Time Protection

Directional Overcurrent Protection In a system including sources at both line terminals, the fault current at the relay location can flow in either direction. In such a case, directional control should be added to overcurrent elements.

15

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

GRE170 provides directional control for phase fault and earth fault overcurrent elements OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4 which can be enabled or disabled by scheme switch setting. The directional characteristic can be selected to “Forward” or “Reverse” or “Non” by scheme switch setting [∗∗∗-DIR]. The OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1 and SEF2 elements have selective inverse time and definite time characteristics.

Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection

Power Systems with Sources at both Line Terminals In power systems with sources at both line terminals as shown in Figure Figure 2-9, the fault current flows in from both terminals.

c b a 1 2 3

G1 G2

F2 F1 Figure 2-9 Protection of a power system with sources at both line terminals

The protection is performed by setting the directional element at points 1, 2 and 3 to operate only when the fault current (F1: solid lines) flows in from source G1 and at points a, b and c to operate only when the fault current (F2: dotted lines) flows in from source G2, with grading provided by time delays.

Directional Characteristics Figure 2-10 shows the directional characteristic, with the forward operate zone shaded. The reverse zone is simply a mirror image of the forward zone. The forward operate zone or reverse operate zone is selectable by the scheme switch [OC-DIR], [EF-DIR] and [SE-DIR]. As shown in Figure 2-11, each directional characteristic is composed of a forward directional characteristic, reverse directional characteristic and overcurrent thresholds.

5 x Is 10 x Is

CA

CA + 30

CA + 60

CA - 30

CA - 60

CA - 180

Forward Operate Zone

Boundary of Operation (lagging)

Boundary of Operation (leading)

Reverse Operate Zone

CA + 90

CA - 90

CA: Characteristic angle

CA - 180

5 x Is

10 x Is

CA

CA + 30

CA + 60

CA - 30

CA - 60

CA - 180

Forward Operate Zone

Boundary of Operation - 87.5° (lagging)

Boundary of Operation +87.5° (leading)

Reverse Operate Zone

CA + 90

CA - 90

CA: Characteristic angle

(a) Characteristic of OC and EF (b) Characteristic of SEF Figure 2-10 Directional Operate Characteristic

16

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 2-11 Directional element

Polarising signals for directional elements are shown in Figure 2-12. Polarisation for directional phase overcurrent element OC is achieved by the 90° quadrature method, whereby the phase angle of each current is compared with the phase to phase voltage between the other two phases. Since the voltage inputs to the relay will normally be connected phase to neutral, the polarising phase to phase voltages are derived internally. The polarizing negative sequence voltage is also derived internally. The polarizing zero sequence voltage is derived from a residual voltage or internally depending on the model. Direction is determined in each case by measuring the phase angle of the current with respect to a suitable polarising quantity. Table 2-2 summarises the current inputs and their respective polarising signals.

Figure 2-12 Relationship between Current Input and Polarising signal

Table 2-2 Directional polarising signals Directional element Current Input Polarising Signal Comment

OC-A Ia Vbc∠90° (*1) Refer to Fig. 2-12 (a)

OC-B Ib Vca∠90° (*1)

OC-C Ic Vab∠90° (*1)

EF Ie -Ve (*2) Refer to Fig. 2-12 (b)

SEF Ise -Ve

(a) (b)

Va

Vb Vc

Vbc∠90°

Ia

Vbc

Va

Vb Vc

−Ve

Ie

Ve

Directional (Forward)

Directional (Reverse)

Overcurrent (1-4 stage)

&

&

∗∗1-4 Forward

∗∗1-4 Reverse

17

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Note (*1): The quadrature voltages used for polarization of the phase fault elements are automatically phase-shifted by +90°, such that they are in phase with the faulted phase voltage under normal conditions. Therefore the faulted phase current will normally lag its polarizing voltage under fault conditions and should be set with a negative characteristic angle. Refer to “Setting for OC and EF protection” for guidance on choice of settings.

Note (*2): When the [APPLVE] setting is “On”, Ve is measured directly in the form of system residual voltage. When the setting is “Off”, Ve is calculated from the three phase voltages.

In the event of a close up three phase fault, all three polarising signals will collapse below the minimum threshold. Voltage memory provides a temporary polarising signal in these circumstances. GRE170 maintains the polarising signal for a short period by reconstructing the pre-fault voltages and judges the fault direction. After the voltage memory has disappeared, the direction judgement is effective while the fault current flows as shown in Figure 2-13.

Phase difference calculation |V|•|I|cos(θ−ϕ) ≥0

Amplitude calculation |Vpol|≥Vset

& Output of directional element

F/F

≥1

1 & Amplitude calculation

|l|≥OCset

1

(Note) OCset: Current setting Vset : Voltage setting. In the case of OC, Vset = 1V fixed.

Figure 2-13 Direction Judgement after Disappearance of Voltage Memory

Scheme Logic

Phase overcurrent protection Figure 2-14 to Figure 2-17 show the scheme logic of the non-directional and directional phase overcurrent protection OC1 to OC4.

Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix K.

The directional control characteristic can be selected to “Forward (FWD)” or “Reverse (REV)” or “Non-directional (Non)” by scheme switch setting [OC∗-DIR] (not shown in Figure 2-14 to Figure 2-17).

OC1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-14. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to “D” and trip signal OC1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOC1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “C” and then setting [MOC1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic, and trip signal OC1_TRIP is given.

The OC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-15. The scheme logic of OC2 is the same as that of the OC1.

Figure 2-16 and Figure 2-17 show the scheme logic of the definite time phase overcurrent protection OC3 and OC4. The OC3 and OC4 give trip and alarm signals OC3_TRIP and OC4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TOC4 respectively.

18

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer energisation, and can block the OC1 to OC4 protection with the scheme switches [OC1-2F] to [OC4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.7.

The trip mode of OC1 TRIP to OC4 ALARM can be selected by setting [OCTP] to “3POR”(any one of 3 phases) or “2OUTOF3”(2 out of 3 phases) gate. With “2OUTOF3” selected, the trip signal is not issued during a single-phase fault. The switch [OCTP] is common for OC1 to OC4 protection.

The OC1 to OC4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] to [OC4EN] or the PLC signals OC1_BLOCK to OC4_BLOCK respectively.

C

B

A

OC1

OC1 TRIP

&

&

& ≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

OC1-A TRIP

OC1-B TRIP

OC1-C TRIP

&

&

&

C

B

A OC1

(INST)

≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

0.00 - 300.00s

TOC1 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCTP] "3POR"

≥1 ≥1

≥1 &

&

&

3POR

2OUTOF3

"ON"

[OC1-EN] +

"DT"

"IEC"

[MOC1]

"IEEE"

"US"

+

"CON"

11

12

13

14

15

16

262

263

264

261

≥1

[OC1-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

1 OC1_BLOCK 1536

OC1_INST_TP 1696

Figure 2-14 OC1 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

19

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C

B

A

OC2

OC2 TRIP

&

&

& ≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

OC2-A TRIP

OC2-B TRIP

OC2-C TRIP

&

&

&

C

B

A OC2

(INST)

≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCTP] "3POR"

≥1 ≥1

≥1 &

&

&

3POR

2OUTOF3

"ON"

[OC2-EN] +

"DT"

"IEC"

[MOC2]

"IEEE"

"US"

+

"CON"

20

21

22

23

24

25

266

267

268

265

≥1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOC2 t 0

t 0

t 0 [OC2-2F]

+ "Block" ICD &

1 OC2_BLOCK 1537

OC2_INST_TP 1697

Figure 2-15 OC2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

1 OC3_BLOCK 1538

C

B

A

OC3 &

TOC3 t 0

& t 0

0.00 - 300.00s

t 0 &

OC3-A TRIP

OC3-B TRIP

OC3-C TRIP ≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

"ON"

[OC3-EN] +

[OC3-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

29

30

31

270

271

272

OC3 TRIP

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCTP] "3POR"

≥1 ≥1

≥1 &

&

&

3POR

2OUTOF3

269

OC3_INST_TP 1698

Figure 2-16 OC3 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection

20

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1 OC4_BLOCK 1539

C

B

A

OC4 &

TOC4 t 0

& t 0

0.00 - 300.00s

t 0 &

OC4-A_ALARM

OC4-B_ALARM

OC4-C_ALARM ≥1

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

"ON"

[OC4-EN] +

[OC4-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

38

39

40

274

275

276

OC4_ALARM

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCTP] "3POR"

≥1 ≥1

≥1 &

&

&

3POR

2OUTOF3

273

OC4_INST_TP 1699

Figure 2-17 OC4 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection

2.1.2 Directional Earth Fault O/C EF (67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage Figure 2-18 to Figure 2-21 show the scheme logics for the non-directional and directional earth fault protection EF1 to EF4.

The directional control characteristic can be selected to “FWD” or “REV” or “Non” by scheme switch setting [EF∗-DIR] (not shown in Figure 2-18 to Figure 2-21). If instantaneous tripping is required, the signal EF∗_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC function.

The EF1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-18. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MEF1] to “D”, and the trip signal EF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MEF1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “C” and then setting [MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal EF1_TRIP is given.

The EF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-19. The scheme logic of EF2 is the same as that of the EF1.

Figure 2-20and Figure 2-21 show the scheme logic of the definite time earth fault protection EF3 and EF4. The EF3 and EF4 give trip and alarm signals EF3_TRIP and EF4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TEF3 and TEF4 respectively.

ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer energisation, and can block the EF1 to EF4 protection by the scheme switches [EF1-2F] to [EF4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.7.

Each tripping is selected by setting [EF∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst” (instantaneous trip), “Set” (delayed trip by TEF∗ and [MEF1] setting) or “Off” (blocked).

The EF1 to EF4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [EF1EN] to [EF4EN] or the PLC signals EF1_BLOCK to EF4_BLOCK respectively.

21

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

EF1

& ≥1

&

EF1_TRIP &

EF1 (INST)

≥1

&

≥1

0.00 - 300.00s

TEF1 t 0

"OFF"

[EF1-EN] + 1

"DT"

"IEC"

[MEF1]

"IEEE"

"US"

+

"CON"

61

62

281

[EF1-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

1 EF1_BLOCK 1544

EF1_INST_TP 1700

Figure 2-18 EF1 Earth Fault Protection

EF2

& ≥1

&

EF2_TRIP &

EF2 (INST)

≥1

&

≥1

0.00 - 300.00s

TEF2 t 0

"OFF"

[EF2-EN] + 1

"DT"

"IEC"

[MEF2]

"IEEE"

"US"

+

"CON"

64

65

282

[EF2-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

1 EF2_BLOCK 1545

EF2_INST_TP 1701

Figure 2-19 EF2 Earth Fault Protection

EF3

≥1

&

EF3_TRIP & 0.00 - 300.00s

TEF3 t 0

"OFF"

[EF3-EN] + 1

[EF3-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

67 283

1 EF3_BLOCK 1546

EF3_INST_TP 1702

Figure 2-20 EF3 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection

22

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

EF4

≥1

&

EF4_ALARM & 0.00 - 300.00s

TEF4 t 0

"OFF"

[EF4-EN] + 1

[EF4-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

70 284

1 EF4_BLOCK 1547

EF4_INST_TP 1703

Figure 2-21 EF4 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection

Setting for OC and EF protection The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks 1CT 1 - 20000 1 400 CT ratio for 3-phase current 1nCT 1 - 20000 1 200 CT ratio for earth fault current CT1 1A / 5A 1A CT rated current CTn1 1A / 5A 1A CT rated current for eath fault OCθ −95 – 95° 1° −45° OC characteristic angle OC1 0.10 – 25.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A OC1 threshold setting TOC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC1 definite time setting. Required if

[MOC1] = D. TOC1M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if

[MOC1] = IEC, IEEE or US. TOC1R 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if

[OC1R] = DEF. TOC1RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 OC1 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [OC1R] = DEP. OC2 0.10 – 25.00 A 0.01 A 5.00 A OC2 threshold setting TOC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC2 definite time setting. Required if

[MOC2] = D. TOC2M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if

[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE or US. TOC2R 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if

[OC2R] = DEF. TOC2RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 OC2 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP. OC3 0.10 – 150.00 A 0.1 A 50.0 A OC3 threshold setting TOC3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC3 definite time setting

OC4 0.10 – 150.00 A 0.1 A 100.0 A OC4 threshold setting TOC4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC4 definite time setting

EFθ −95 – 95 ° 1° −45 ° EF characteristic angle

23

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Element Range Step Default Remarks EFV 0.5 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 3.0 V EF ZPS voltage level

EF1 0.05– 25.00 A 0.01 A 0.30 A EF1 threshold setting TEF1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1]

= D. TEF1M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if

[MEF1] = IEC, IEEE or US. TEF1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if

[EF1R] = DEF. TEF1RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 EF1 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [EF1R] = DEP. EF2 0.05 – 25.00 A 0.01 A 3.00 A EF2 threshold setting TEF2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF2 definite time setting. Required if [MEF2]

= D. TEF2M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if

[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE or US. TEF2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if

[EF2R] = DEF. TEF2RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 EF2 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP. EF3 0.05 – 100.0 A 0.1 A 25.0 A EF3 threshold setting TEF3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF3 definite time setting

EF4 0.05 – 100.00 A 0.1 A 5.00 A EF4 threshold setting TEF4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF4 definite time setting

[OC1EN] Off / On On OC1 Enable [OC1-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD OC1 directional characteristic [MOC1] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D OC1 time characteristic [MOC1C] MOC1C-IEC MOC1C-IEEE MOC1C-US

NI / VI / EI / LTI MI / VI / EI CO2 / CO8

NI MI CO2

OC1 inverse curve type. Required if [MOC1] = IEC. Required if [MOC1] = IEEE. Required if [MOC1] = US.

[OC1R] DEF / DEP DEF OC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC1] = IEEE or US.

[OC2EN] Off / On Off OC2 Enable [OC2-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD OC2 directional characteristic [MOC2] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D OC2 time characteristic [MOC2C] MOC2C-IEC MOC2C-IEEE MOC2C-US


NI MI CO2

OC2 inverse curve type. Required if [MOC2] = IEC. Required if [MOC2] = IEEE. Required if [MOC2] = US.

[OC2R] DEF / DEP DEF OC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC2] = IEEE or US.

[OC3EN] Off / On Off OC3 Enable [OC3-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD OC3 directional characteristic [OC4EN] Off / On Off OC4 Enable

24

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Element Range Step Default Remarks [OC4-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD OC4 directional characteristic [OCTP] 3POR / 2OUTOF3 3POR OC trip mode [EF1EN] Off / On On EF1 Enable [EF1-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD EF1 directional characteristic [MEF1] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D EF1 time characteristic [MEF1C] MEF1C-IEC MEF1C-IEEE MEF1C-US


NI MI CO2

EF1 inverse curve type. Required if [MEF1] = IEC. Required if [MEF1] = IEEE. Required if [MEF1] = US.

[EF1R] DEF / DEP DEF EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1] = IEEE or US.

[EF2EN] Off / On Off EF2 Enable [EF2-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD EF2 directional characteristic [MEF2] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D EF2 time characteristic [MEF2C] MEF2C-IEC MEF2C-IEEE MEF2C-US


NI MI CO2

EF2 inverse curve type. Required if [MEF2] = IEC. Required if [MEF2] = IEEE. Required if [MEF2] = US.

[EF2R] DEF / DEP DEF EF2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2] = IEEE or US.

[EF3EN] Off / On Off EF3 Enable [EF3-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD EF3 directional characteristic [EF4EN] Off / On Off EF4 Enable [EF4-DIR] FWD/REV/NON FWD EF4 directional characteristic

[Time Overcurrent Protection Setting]

(1) Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Current setting In Figure 2-22, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, also considering backup protection for a fault on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at remote end F3.

To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for the residual overcurrent element, assuming the probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the next section is assumed to be open.

The higher the current setting, the more effective will be the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the lower the setting, the more dependable will be the operation. For positive and dependable operation a setting should be chosen that is lower than the minimum fault current; typical settings of around 1 to 1.5 times less than the minimum fault current are usual in order to ensure the most effective use of the inverse characteristic.

For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.

The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the

25

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.

F3 F2 F1

C B A

Figure 2-22 Current Settings in Radial Feeder

Time setting Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to relays on adjacent feeders. Consider the minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a maximum. In Figure 2-22, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time coordination must also be kept.

The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for the small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each terminal.

The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a fault at point F2 in Figure 2-22.

Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm

where, T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B

T2: relay reset time at A

Tm: time margin

(2) Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Current setting The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault at the remote end of the next feeder section.

Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.

The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the selection of instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to operate for large motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.

Time setting When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way as explained in “Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection”.

26

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(3) Directional Characteristic Angle Setting OC Characteristic Angle The quadrature voltages used for polarization of the phase fault directional elements are automatically phase-shifted in GRE170 by +90˚, such that they are in phase with the corresponding phase voltages under normal conditions. Under fault conditions, the faulted phase current will lag its phase voltage (and hence its polarising voltage) by an angle dependent on the system X/R ratio. Therefore, it is necessary to apply a negative characteristic angle to the phase fault directional elements in order to obtain maximum sensitivity.

The characteristic angle is determined by the [OCTH] setting. The actual value chosen will depend on the application, but recommended settings for the majority of typical applications are as follows:

• -60°, for protection of plain feeders, or applications with an earthing point behind the relay location.

• -45°, for protection of transformer feeders, or applications with an earthing point in front of the relay location.

EF Characteristic Angle When determining the characteristic angle for directional earth fault protection, the method of system earthing must be considered. In solidly earthed systems, the earth fault current tends to lag the faulted phase voltage (and hence the inverted residual voltage used for polarising) by a considerable angle, due to the reactance of the source. In resistance earthed systems the angle will be much smaller.

Commonly applied settings are as follows:

• -60°, for protection of solidly earthed transmission systems.

• -45°, for protection of solidly earthed distribution systems.

• 0° or -15°, for protection of resistance earthed systems.

2.1.3 Directional Sensitive Earth Fault O/C SEF (67/50N, 67/51N): 1st stage to 4th stage The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected for earth faults. Furthermore, the SEF elements of GRE170 are also applicable to the “standby earth fault protection” and the “high impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers”.

GRE170 provides directional earth fault protection with more sensitive settings for use in applications where the fault current magnitude may be very low. A 4-stage directional overcurrent function is provided, with the first stage programmable for inverse time or definite time operation. The second, third and fourth stages provide definite time operation.

The sensitive earth fault element includes a digital filter which rejects all harmonics other than the fundamental power system frequency.

The sensitive earth fault quantity is measured directly, using a dedicated core balance earth fault CT.

This input can also be used in transformer restricted earth fault applications, by the use of external metrosils (varistors) and setting resistors.

The directional sensitive earth fault elements can be configured for directional operation in the same way as the standard earth fault pole, by polarising against the residual voltage. An additional restraint on operation can be provided by a Zero phase sequence Power element ZP, for use in

27

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

protection of power systems which utilise resonant (Petersen coil) earthing methods.

The SEF elements provide 50 times more sensitive setting ranges (1 mA to 1.00A) than the regular earth fault protection.

Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.

The SEF protection is provided in Model 220, 221, 222, 320, 321 and 322 which have a dedicated earth fault input circuit.

The element SEF1 and SEF2 provide inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. Stage 2 of the two-stage overcurrent protection is used only for the standby earth fault protection. The SEF3 and SEF4 provide definite time overcurrent protection.

When SEF employs IEEE or US inverse time characteristics, two reset modes are available: definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is employed, definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.1.

In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.

The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to an unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.

The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may also be caused by CT errors that may occur during phase faults. Transient false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-23 to Figure 2-26 show the scheme logic for the directional sensitive earth fault protection. The directional control characteristic can be selected to “FWD” or “REV” or “Non” by scheme switch setting [SE∗-DIR].

Figure 2-23 shows the scheme logic of directional sensitive earth fault protection SEF1 with inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to “D”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and stage 1 trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “C” and then setting [MSE1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic. The element SEF1 is enabled and stage 1 trip signal SEF1_TRIP is given.

Both protections provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TS1S2.

When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1 continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the stage 2 trip signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).

The SEF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-24. The scheme logic of SEF2 is the same as that of SEF1 except for SEF1-S2_TRIP.

Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26 show the scheme logic of the definite time sensitive earth fault protection SEF3 and SEF4. SEF3 and SEF4 give trip and alarm signals SEF3_TRIP and SEF4_ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 respectively.

ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during

28

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

transformer energisation, and can block the SEF1 to SEF4 protection by the scheme switches [SE1-2F] to [SE4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.1.7.

SEF1 & ≥1

SEF1 INST &

"ON" [SE1EN] +

ZPF

ZPR

+ "OFF" [ZPEN]

"ON"

&

&

≥1

≥1

≥1 SEF1-S1_TRIP

0.00 - 300.00s

TSE1 t 0

&

"D"

[MSE1]

"IEC"

"IEEE"

+

"US"

SEF1-S2_ TRIP +

"ON"

[SE1S2] &

0.00 - 300.00s

TSE12 t 0

&

&

+

"REV" [SE1 DIR] "FWD"

≥1

&

≥1

1

≥1 "OFF"

VTF_SE1BLK Non VTF

&

+

"C"

"NON"

SEF1 ON

&

141

[SE1-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

142

291

292

SEF1_BLOCK 1552

Figure 2-23 SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

29

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

SEF2 & ≥1

SEF2 INST &

"ON" [SE2EN] +

ZPF

ZPR

+ "OFF" [ZPEN]

"ON"

&

&

≥1

≥1

≥1 SEF2_TRIP 0.00 - 300.00s

TSE2 t 0

&

"D"

[MSE2]

"IEC"

"IEEE"

+

"US"

&

&

+


≥1

&

≥1

1

≥1 "OFF"

VTF_SE2BLK Non VTF

&

+

"C"

"NON"

SEF2 ON

&

143

[SE2-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

144

293

SEF2_BLOCK 1553


ZPF

ZPR

+ "OFF" [ZPEN]

"ON"

&

&

≥1

≥1

&

&

+


≥1

SEF3 &

"ON" [SE3EN]

+

SEF3 TRIP 0.00 - 300.00s

TSE3 t 0

&

&

1

≥1 "OFF"

VTF_SE3BLK Non VTF

&

+

≥1

"NON"

SEF3 ON

[SE3-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

SEF3_BLOCK 1554

145

294


30

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

RPF

RPR

+ "OFF" [RPEN]

"ON"

&

&

≥1

≥1

&

&

+


≥1

SEF4 &

"ON" [SE4EN]

+

SEF4_ALARM 0.00 - 300.00s

TSE4 t 0

&

&

1

≥1 "OFF"

VTF_SE4BLK Non VTF

&

+

≥1

"NON"

SEF4 ON

[SE4-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

SEF4_BLOCK 1555

146

295

Figure 2-26 SEF4 Sensitive Definite Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks SEFCT 1 - 20000 1 150 CT ratio for SEFCT SEθ −95° – 95° 1° 0° SEF characteristic angle SEV 0.5 – 100.0 0.1 V 3.0V SEF ZPS voltage level SE1 0.001 – 1.000 A 0.001 A 0.005 A SEF1 threshold setting TSE1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF1 definite time setting. Required if

[MSE1] = D. TSE1M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.

Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE or US. TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required

if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF. TSE1RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP. TSE12 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting SE2 0.001 – 1.000 A 0.001 A 0.010 A SEF2 threshold setting TSE2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF2 definite time setting. Required if

[MSE2] = D. TSE2M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting.

Required if [MSE2] = IEC, IEEE or US. TSE2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required

if [MSE2] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF. TSE2RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time

multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP. SE3 0.001 – 1.000 A 0.001 A 0.100 A SEF3 threshold setting TSE3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF3 definite time setting. SE4 0.001 – 1.000 A 0.001 A 0.500 A SEF4 threshold setting TSE4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF4 definite time setting. ZP 0.00 – 100.00 W 0.01 W 0.00 W Zero phase sequence power sensitivity

31

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Element Range Step Default Remarks [SE1EN] Off / On Off SEF1 Enable [SE1-DIR] FWD / REV / NON FWD SEF1 directional characteristic [MSE1] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D SEF1 characteristic [MSE1C] MSE1C-IEC MSE1C-IEEE MSE1C-US


NI MI CO2

SEF1 inverse curve type. Required if [MSE1] = IEC. Required if [MSE1] = IEEE. Required if [MSE1] = US.

[SE1R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MSE1] = IEEE or US.

[SE1S2] Off / On Off SEF1 stage 2 timer enable [SE2EN] Off / On Off SEF2 Enable [SE2-DIR] FWD / REV /NON FWD SEF2 directional characteristic [MSE2] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D SEF2 characteristic [MSE2C] MSE2C-IEC MSE2C-IEEE MSE2C-US


NI MI CO2

SEF2 inverse curve type. Required if [MSE2] = IEC. Required if [MSE2] = IEEE. Required if [MSE2] = US.

[SE2R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if [MSE2] = IEEE or US.

[SE3EN] Off / On Off SEF3 Enable [SE3-DIR] FWD / REV / NON FWD SEF3 directional characteristic [VTF-SE3BLK] Off / On Off VTF block enable [SE4EN] Off / On Off SEF4 Enable [SE4-DIR] FWD / REV / NON FWD SEF4 directional characteristic [ZPEN] Off / On Off Zero phase sequence power block enable

SEF SEF is set lower than the available earth fault current and higher than the erroneous zero-phase current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to an unbalanced feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder, but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may also be caused by CT errors that may occur during phase faults.

The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.

Directional SEF Directional SEF protection is commonly applied to unearthed systems, and to systems earthed by an inductance (Peterson Coil).

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent NOC (46): 1st and 2nd stage The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NOC or NC) is used to detect asymmetrical faults (phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance conditions.

32

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Phase overcurrent protection must be set to a lower sensitivity when the load current is large but NOC sensitivity is not affected by the magnitude of the load current except in the case of the erroneous negative sequence current experienced due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines.

For some earth faults, only a small zero sequence current is fed while the negative sequence current is comparatively large. This is more likely the case for a fault occurring at the remote end of a feeder having a small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the remote end.

In these cases, NOC backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NOC can also be used to protect the rotor of a rotating machine from over heating by detecting a load unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to the loss of a phase can also lead to increases in negative sequence current and in machine heating.

GRE170 provides directional negative sequence overcurrent protection with definite time characteristics.

Two independent elements NOC1 and NOC2 are provided for tripping and alarm purposes. These elements can be directionalised by polarising against the negative sequence voltage.

The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch [APPLCT] is set to “On”.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-27 and Figure 2-28 show the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent protection NOC1 and NOC2.

The NOC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-28. The scheme logic of NOC2 is the same as that of the NOC1.

The NOC1 and NOC2 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [NC1EN], [NC2EN] and [APPLCT] or the PLC signals NOC1_BLOCK and NOC2_BLOCK respectively.

The scheme switch [APPLCT] is available in which three-phase overcurrent protection can be selected. The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT] is set to “On”.

NOC1 & ≥1

&

NOC1_TRIP &

NOC1 (INST)

0.00 - 300.00s

TNC1 t 0

"OFF"

[NC1-EN] + 1

110

111

311

[NC1-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

"IEC"

[MNC1]

"IEEE" "US"

+

"CON"

≥1

1 NOC1_BLOCK 1560

Figure 2-27 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC1 Scheme Logic

33

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1 NOC2_BLOCK 1561

NOC2 & ≥1

&

NOC2_ALARM &

NOC2 (INST)

0.00 - 300.00s

TNC2 t 0

"OFF"

[NC2-EN] + 1

113

114

312

[NC2-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

"IEC"

[MNC2]

"IEEE" "US"

+

"CON"

≥1

Figure 2-28 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC2 Scheme Logic

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NOC protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks NC1 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.40 A NOC1 threshold setting. TNC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOC1 definite time setting. Required if [MNC1] = D. TNC1M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 NOC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC1] =

IEC, IEEE or US. TNC1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC1R]

= DEF. TNC1RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 NC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.

Required if [NC1R] = DEP. NC2 0.10 - 10.00 A 0.1 A 0.20 A NOC2 threshold setting. TNC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NOC2 definite time setting TNC2M 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 NOC2 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC2] =

IEC, IEEE or US. TNC2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC2R]

= DEF. TNC2RM 0.010 – 15.000 0.001 1.000 NC2 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.

Required if [NC2R] = DEP. [NC1EN] Off / On Off NOC1 Enable [MNC1C]

MNC1C-IEC MNC1C-IEEE MNC1C-US


NI MI CO2

NOC1 inverse curve type. Required if [MNC1] = IEC. Required if [MNC1] = IEEE. Required if [MNC1] = US.

[NC1R] DEF / DEP DEF NOC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC1] = IEEE or US.

[NC2EN] Off / On Off NOC2 Enable [MNC2C]

MNC2C-IEC MNC2C-IEEE

NI / VI / EI / LTI MI / VI / EI

NI MI

NOC2 inverse curve type. Required if [MNC2] = IEC. Required if [MNC2] = IEEE.

34

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Element Range Step Default Remarks MNC2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MNC2] = US.

[NC2R] DEF / DEP DEF NOC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC2] = IEEE or US.

[APPLCT] Off / On 3P Three-phase current input

Sensitive setting of NOC1 and NOC2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence current normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the relay continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the maximum value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set NOC1 and NOC2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.

The delay time setting TNC1 and TNC2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements NOC1 and NOC2. The minimum operating time of the NOC elements is around 200ms.

2.1.5 Phase Undercurrent UC (37P): 1st and 2nd stage The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load, typically motor load. Two stage undercurrent protections UC1 and UC2 are available.

The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. But the operation is blocked when the current falls below 0.04A of CT secondary current to discriminate the loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection. Figure 2-30 shows the undercurrent element characteristic.

Figure 2-30 Undercurrent Element Characteristic

Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarm purposes. The elements are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.

The undercurrent element operates on a per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is three- phase only.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-31 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.

The undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output UC1 TRIP and UC2 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.

This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or PLC signals UC1 BLOCK and UC2 BLOCK.

I 0

Setting value

0.04

Operating zone |I| ≤ UC1 setting

|I| ≥ 0.04

& UC1

|I| ≤ UC2 setting UC2 &

35

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C

B

A I ≥ 0.04A

C

B

A

UC1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUC1 t 0

t 0

t 0

UC1_TRIP ≥ 1

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

+ "ON"

[UC1EN]

C

B

A

UC2

0.00 - 300.00s

TUC2 t 0

t 0

t 0

UC2_ALARM ≥ 1

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

+ "ON"

[UC2EN]

UC1-C_TRIP

UC1-B_TRIP

UC1-A_TRIP

UC2-C_ALARM

UC2-B_ALARM

UC2-A_ALARM

In : Rated current

94

95

96

97

98

99

302

303

304

301

306

307

308

305

1 UC1_BLOCK 1568

1 UC2_BLOCK 1569

Figure 2-31 Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

UC1 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.40 A UC1 threshold setting

TUC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC1 definite time setting

UC2 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.20 A UC2 threshold setting

TUC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC2 definite time setting

[UC1EN] Off / On Off UC1 Enable

[UC2EN] Off / On Off UC2 Enable

36

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.1.6 Circuit Breaker Fail CBF (50BF) When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the fault by back tripping adjacent circuit breakers.

If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element CBF provided for each phase. For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than 20ms) is used. The CBF element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value as shown in Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32 CBF element Characteristic

In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.

An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operates correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.

Scheme logic BFP initiation is performed on a per-phase basis. Figure 2-33 shows the scheme logic for the BFP. The BFP is started by single phase reclose initiation signals CBF_INIT-A to CBF_INIT-C or three-phase reclose initiation signal CBF_INIT. (These signals are assigned by the PLC default setting). These signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.

The back tripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation. Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with scheme switch [BTC].

There are two kinds of modes for the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode in which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which retrip is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is the trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.

Figure 2-34 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include that of TRTC.

I 0

Pick-up

Drop-off

Drop-off/Pick-up=0.8

37

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and the BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.

If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is completed.

The BFP protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [BTC] and [RTC] or the PLC signal CBF BLOCK.

Figure 2-33 Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic

+

"ON"

[BTC]

C

B

A

CBF

CBF TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TBTC t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

CBF RETRIP

≥1

≥1

≥1 0.00 - 300.00s

TRTC t 0

t 0

t 0

&

"DIR"

+ "OC"

[RTC]

&

&

&

≥1

≥1

≥1

+ "3P"

[APPL-CT]

≥ 1

CBF TRIP-A

CBF TRIP-B

CBF TRIP-C

CBF RETRIP-A

CBF RETRIP-B

CBF RETRIP-C

&

123

124

125

322

323

324

319

320

321

315

316

317

318

314

CBF_INIT-A 1660

&

&

&

1 CBF_BLOCK 1570

CBF_INIT-B 1661

CBF_INIT-C 1662

CBF_INIT 1663

CBF_OP-A

CBF_OP-B

CBF_OP-C

GEN._TRIP

Default setting

38

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 2-34 Sequence Diagram

Setting The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as follows:


CBF 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.05 A 0.50 A Overcurrent setting

TRTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Retrip time setting

TBTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Back trip time setting

[RTC] Off / DIR / OC Off Retrip control

[BTC] Off / On Off Back trip control

The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of the rated current.

The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker (Tcb in Figure 2-34) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2-34). The timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.

Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin = 40ms + 10ms + 20ms = 70ms

Setting of TBTC = TCBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin = 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms = 140ms

If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.

Fault

CBF TRIP

TBTC

CBF RETRIP

TRTC

OCBF

Original breakers

Adjacent breakers

TRIP Retrip

Toc Toc

Tcb T cb

TBF1

TBF2

Normal trip

Open Closed

Start CBFP

Open Open Closed

Trip

39

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.1.7 Inrush restraint (2f) Inrush current detector ICD is used to detect second harmonic inrush current during transformer energisation and can be used to block the following protections:

- OC1 to OC4 - EF1 to EF4 - SEF1 to SEF4 - NOC1 and NOC2 - OCV1 and OCV2 - RP1 and RP2

Blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC∗-2F], [EF∗-2F], [SEF∗-2F], [NOC∗-2F], [OCV∗-2F] and [RP∗-2F].

The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between the second harmonic current I2f and the fundamental current I1f independently for each phase, and will operate if the ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure 2-35 shows the characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2-36 shows the ICD block scheme. When ICD operates, OC, EF, SEF, NOC, OCV and RP elements are blocked independently. The scheme logic of each element is shown in the previous sections.

I1f 0

I2f/I1f

ICD-2f(%)

ICDOC

|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%)

|I1f|≥ICDOC

& ICD

Figure 2-35 ICD Element Characteristic

ICD

ICD ≥1

A

B

C

100

101

102

468

Figure 2-36 ICD Block Scheme

Setting The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:


ICD-2f 10 – 50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection

ICDOC 0.10 – 25.0 A 0.01 A 0.10 A ICD threshold setting

2.1.8 Voltage controlled O/C (51V) A voltage controlled or voltage restrained inverse overcurrent protection OCV will respond to faults that may occur on the lower voltage when the fault current may be lower than the normal value for certain type of fault. The OCV is equipped so that the relay can issue a trip signal sensitively against

40

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a certain fault on lower voltage side when a current becomes lower than nominal value. This function is enabled when [APPLVT] is set to 3PP or 3PN and is applicable only for 200A and 300A series models.

Figure 2-37 shows the scheme logic of Voltage controlled overcurrent protection. The Voltage controlled overcurrent protection element OCV can be selected either voltage controlled overcurrent function “Cont” or voltage restrained overcurrent “Rest” function.

591

592

593

OCV1

C

B

A

[OCV1-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

&

&

&

595

596

597

OCV1 TRIP

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCV1TP]

"3POR"

≥1 ≥1 &

&

&

594

≥1

OCV1-A TRIP

OCV1-B TRIP

OCV1-C TRIP

+ "Off" [MOCV1] "Cont"

1 OCV1_BLOCK 1581

"Rest"

598

598

600

OCV2

C

B

A

[OCV2-2F] + "Block"

ICD &

&

&

&

602

603

604

OCV2 ALARM

&

&

+ "2OUTOF3"

[OCV2TP]

"3POR"

≥1 ≥1 &

&

&

601

≥1

OCV2-A ALARM

OCV2-B ALARM

OCV2-C ALARM

+ "Off" [MOCV2] "Cont"

1 OCV2_BLOCK 1582

"Rest"

Figure 2-37 Voltage controlled Overcurrent Protection OCV1 and OCV2 Scheme Logic

2.1.8.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent function The Voltage controlled overcurrent function can be changed by enabling / disabling the OCI element and the system voltage. When system voltage is higher than the setting of the voltage value, the OCI element is turned off. If the system voltage exceeds the setting value during OCI timer count-up, the OCI timer counter is reseted. The Voltage Contorolled overcurrent function is enabled by the scheme switch [OCVEN] = “Cont” setting.

Note: OCI means OC element with inverse characteristic.

41

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

V

(p.u.)

0

Ip

OCV (V) Ip: Overcurrent element pick up current OCV; Voltage controlled threshold voltage

Figure 2-38 Voltage Controlled overcurrent function pick-up zone

2.1.8.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent fucntion The Voltage restrained overcurrent function can change the OCI pick up threshold level by the system voltage. The change of the OCI threshold level is as below.

1) OCV(V)Voltage)(input 0.1 ≤ … OCI threshold pick-up = 1.0 p.u. (Rated current)

2) 0.1OCV(V)Voltage)(input 2.0 <≤ … OCI threshold pick-up = OCV(V)Voltage)(input

3) 2.0OCV(V)Voltage)(input < … OCI threshold pick-up = 0.2 p.u. (Rated current)

V/OCV

(p.u.)

0 0.2 (p.u.)

Ip: Overcurrent element pick up current OCV; Voltage controlled

threshold voltage

Ip

0.2

1.0

1.0

Figure 2-39 Voltage Restrained overcurrent function pick-up zone

The Voltage restrained overcurrent function is enabled by the scheme switch [OCVEN] = “Rest” setting.

Setting The following shows the setting elements for the voltage controlled overcurrent protection and their setting ranges.

42

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


OCV1 , OCV2 10.00 − 120.00V 0.01V 70.00 Voltage threshold setting

OCV1IS, OCV2IS 0.10 − 5.00(*) 0.01 1.00 Inverse time overcurrent if [OCV] = cont

TOCV1M, TOCV2M 0.010-15.000 0.001 1.000 OCV time multiplier setting.

TOCV1R, TOCV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OCV definite time delayed reset. Required if [MOCV1R] to [MOCV2R] = DEF.

TOCV1RM, TOCV2RM

0.010-15.000 0.001 1.000 OCV dependent time delayed reset time multiplier. Required if [MOCV1R], [MOCV2R] = DEP.

OCV userconfigurable curve setting

OCV1-k, OCV2-k 0.00-300.00 0.001

OCV userconfigurable curve setting.

Required if [MOCV1], [MOCV2] = C.

OCV1-α, OCV2-α 0.01-5.00 0.01

OCV1-c, OCV2-c 0.000-5.000 0.001

OCV1-kr, OCV2-kr 0.00-30.000 0.001

OCV1-β, OCV2-β 0.01-5.00 0.01

Scheme switch

[MOCV1], [MOCV2] IEC/IEEE/US/C IEC OCV elements time characteristic

[MOCV1C-IEC], [MOCV2C-IEC]

NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOCV1], [MOCV2] = IEC.

[MOCV1C-IEEE], [MOCV2C-IEEE]

MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOCV1], [MOCV2] = IEEE.

[MOCV1-US], [MOCV2-US]

CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOCV1], [MOCV2] = US.

[OCV1EN], [OCV2EN]

Off / Cont / Rest Off OCV elements

[MOCV1R], [MOCV2R]

DEF / DEP DEF OCV reset characteristic. Required if [M1OCV1] to [M2OCV2] = IEEE or US.

[OCV1-2F],

[OCV2-2F]

NA / Block NA OC and OCI elements 2f-Lock enable.

[OCV1TP],

[OCV2TP]

3POR / 2OUTOF3 3POR OC trip mode

Note(∗):Multiplier of (rated voltage) / (rated frequency)

43

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.2 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 2.2.1 Phase Overvoltage OV (59): 1st stage to 4th stage

GRE170 provides four independent phase overvoltage elements each having a programmable drop-off/pick-up (DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. OV3 and OV4 have definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2-40 shows the characteristic of the overvoltage elements.

Figure 2-40 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(1)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2-41. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2-41, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [OV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Specification of Inverse Time Curves Curve Description k a c

“IDMT” 1 1 0

“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 by 0.001 step

0.00 – 5.00 by 0.01 step

0.000 – 5.000 by 0.001 step

The OV3 and OV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.

V 0

Pickup

Dropoff

44

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.


Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop-off/pick-up (DO/PU) ratio.

Overvoltage Inverse TimeCurves

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 1

TMS = 2

TMS = 5

TMS = 10

Figure 2-41 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic Figure 2-42 to Figure 2-45 show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV4.

The OV1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-42. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.

The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in

45

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 2-43. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

Figure 2-44 and Figure 2-45 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection OV3 and OV4. The OV3 and OV4 elements give trip and alarm signals OV3_TRIP and OV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3 and TOV4 respectively.

The OV1 to OV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV4EN] or the PLC signals OV1_BLOCK to OV4_BLOCK respectively.

A OV1 INST

B

C

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV1_TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV1 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& A OV1 B

C

OV1-C_TRIP

OV1-A_TRIP

OV1-B_TRIP &

&

& 140

141

142

331

332

333

334 143

144

145

1 OV1_BLOCK 1584

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV1EN]

+ ≥1

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-42 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

A OV2 INST

B

C

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV2_TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV2 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& A OV2 B

C

OV2-C_TRIP

OV2-A_TRIP

OV2-B_TRIP &

&

& 146

147

148

335

336

337

338 149

150

151

1 OV2_BLOCK 1585

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV2EN]

+ ≥1

≥1 "C"


OV3_TRIP ≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV3 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& A OV3 B

C

OV3-C_TRIP

OV3-A_TRIP

OV3-B_TRIP &

&

&

[OV3EN] +

152

153

154

431

432

433

434

1 OV3_BLOCK 1586


46

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

OV4_ALARM ≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV4 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& A OV4 B

C

OV4-C_ALARM

OV4-A_ALARM

OV4-B_ALARM &

&

&

[OV4EN] +

155

156

157

435

436

437

438

1 OV4_BLOCK 1587


Setting The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.


PVT 1 - 20000 1 100 VT ratio for phase voltage

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV4 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV4 threshold setting.

TOV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV4 definite time setting.

OV4DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV4 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable

[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable

[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable

[OV4EN] Off / On Off OV4 Enable

47

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.2.2 Phase Undervoltage UV (27): 1st stage to 4th stage GRE170 provides four independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 and UV4 have definite time characteristics only.

Figure 2-46 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

V 0

Figure 2-46 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(2)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = undervoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2-47. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2-47, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [UV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2-3.

The UV3 and UV4 elements are used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

48

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Undervoltage Inverse TimeCurves

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2-47 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic Figure 2-48 to Figure 2-51 show the scheme logics of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV4.

The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-48. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.

The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2-49. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.

Figure 2-50 and Figure 2-51 show the scheme logics of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3 and UV4. The UV3 and UV4 elements give trip and alarm signals UV3_TRIP and UV4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3 and TUV4 respectively.

The UV1 to UV4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV4EN] or the PLC signals UV1_BLOCK to UV4_BLOCK respectively.

In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages drop below this setting, then UV1 to UV4 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used) when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load shedding.

Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values. Further, this protection can be blocked when VT failure (VTF) is detected.

49

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV1_TRIP

≥ 1

1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV1 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

"ON"

[VBLKEN] +

"OFF"

[UVTST] +

UV1-C_TRIP

UV1-B_TRIP

UV1-A_TRIP A UV1 B

C

"DT"

"IDMT" [UV1EN] +

≥1

A

UVBLK B

C

569

570

571

A UV1 INST

B

C

162

163

164

159

160

161

&

UVBLK 217

1 UV1_BLOCK 1588

342

343

344

341

t 0

0.05s

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-48 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV2_TRIP

≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV2 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

UV2-C_TRIP

UV2-B_TRIP

UV2-A_TRIP A UV2 B

C

"DT"

"C" [UV2EN]

+

≥1

A UV2 INST

B

C

168

169

170

165

166

167

1 UV2_BLOCK 1589

346

347

348

345

≥1 "IDMT"


+ "ON"

[UV3EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV3 t 0

t 0

t 0

A

UV3 B

C

UV3_TRIP ≥ 1

UV3-C_TRIP

UV3-A_TRIP

UV3-B_TRIP

NON UVBLK

1

&

&

&

171

172

173

440

441

442

439

UV3_BLOCK 1590


50

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

+ "ON"

[UV4EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV4 t 0

t 0

t 0

A

UV4 B

C

UV4_ALARM ≥ 1

UV4-C_ALARM

UV4-A_ALARM

UV4-B_ALARM

NON UVBLK

1

&

&

&

174

175

176

444

445

446

443

UV4_BLOCK 1591


Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting ranges.


UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 10.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 15.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 10.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UV3 definite time setting.

UV4 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V UV4 threshold setting.

TUV4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s UV4 definite time setting.

VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV1 Enable

[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable

[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV2 Enable

[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable

[UV4EN] Off / On Off UV4 Enable

51

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.2.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage ZOV (59N): 1st and 2nd stage The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZOV) is applied for earth fault detection on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.

The ZOV protection is available using the [APPLVE] setting. When the [APPLVE] setting is “On”, V0 is measured directly in the form of the system voltage. When the setting is “Off”, V0 is calcurlated from the three measured phase voltages.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZOV element susceptible to any 3rd harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.

For earth fault detection, the following two methods are used generally.

• Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-delta connection) as shown in Figure 2-52

• Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2-53 A B C

GRE170 V0

Figure 2-52 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

GRE170

A B

V0

G

Resistor

Figure 2-53 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 are provided. These elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(3)

52

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),

V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is shown in Figure 2-54. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2-54, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [ZOV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2-3.

ZOV Overvoltage InverseTime Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2-54 IDMT Characteristic for ZOV

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-55 and Figure 2-56 show the scheme logics of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZOV1 and ZOV2 with independent

53

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

thresholds output trip signals ZOV1 TRIP and ZOV2 TRIP via delayed pick-up timers TZOV1 and TZOV2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZOV1EN] and [ZOV2EN] or PLC signals ZOV1 BLOCK and ZOV2 BLOCK.

Further, this protection can be blocked when a VT failure (VTF) is detected.

ZOV1 ZOV1 TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZOV1 t 0

1

&

&

"DT" "IDMT" [ZOV1EN]

+ ≥1

189

ZOV1 INST

190 351

ZOV1_BLOCK 1592

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-55 ZOV1 Overvoltage Protection

ZOV2 ZOV2_ALARM ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZOV2 t 0

1

&

&

"DT" "IDMT" [ZOV2EN]

+ ≥1

191

ZOV2 INST

192 352

ZOV2_BLOCK 1593

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-56 ZOV2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks VEVT 1 – 20000 1 100 VT ratio for zero phase voltage ZOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZOV1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping. TZOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 10.00 ZOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV1EN]=IDMT. TZOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s ZOV1 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV1EN] =DT.

TZOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV1 definite time delayed reset. ZOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZOV2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming. TZOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 10.00 ZOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZOV2EN] =IDMT. TZOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZOV2 definite time setting. Required if [ZOV2EN] =DT. TZOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZOV2 definite time delayed reset. [ZOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZOV1 Enable [ZOV2EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off ZOV2 Enable

54

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.2.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage NOV (47): 1st and 2nd stage The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection is used to detect voltage unbalance conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.

The NOV protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be caused by voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.

The NOV protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if the phase sequence is reversed.

Two independent elements NOV1 and NOV2 are provided. The elements are programmable for definite time delay or inverse time delay (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC 60255-127.

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(4)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),

V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2-57. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2-57, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [NOV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table Table 2-3.

55

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

NOV OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2-57 IDMT Characteristic for NOV

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NOV1 element when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-58 and Figure 2-59 show the scheme logics of the negative sequence overvoltage protection. Two negative sequence overvoltage elements, NOV1 and NOV2 with independent thresholds output trip signals NOV1 TRIP and NOV2 TRIP via delayed pick-up timers TNOV1 and TNOV2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [NOV1EN] and [NOV2EN] or PLC signals NOV1 BLOCK and NOV2 BLOCK.

Further, this protection can be blocked when VT failure (VTF) is detected.

56

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

NOV1 NOV1 TRIP ≥ 1

&

0.00 - 300.00s

TNOV1 t 0

1

&

&

"DT" "IDMT" [NOV1EN]

+ ≥1

193

NOV1 INST

194 353

NOV1_BLOCK 1596

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-58 NOV1 Overvoltage Protection

NOV2 NOV2_ALARM ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNOV2 t 0

1

&

&

"DT" "IDMT" [NOV2EN]

+ ≥1

195

NOV2 INST

196 354

NOV2_BLOCK 1597

≥1 "C"

Figure 2-59 NOV2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

The delay time setting TNOV1 and TNOV2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements NOV1 and NOV2. The minimum operating time of the NOV elements is around 200ms.


NOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NOV1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NOV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV1EN]=IDMT.

TNOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NOV1 definite time setting. Required if [NOV1EN] =DT.

TNOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV1 definite time delayed reset.

NOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NOV2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 10.00 NOV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NOV2EN] =IDMT.

TNOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NOV2 definite time setting. Required if [NOV2EN] =DT.

TNOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NOV2 definite time delayed reset.

[NOV1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NOV1 Enable

[NOV2EN] Off / On Off NOV2 Enable

57

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.3 Frequency Protection Providing four-stage frequency protection, GRE170 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency, overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.

Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between power generation capability and loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load shedding.

Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage due to overfrequency conditions.

Frequency rate of change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly when the frequency change is very rapid.

A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.3.1 Under/Overfrequency FRQ (81U/81O): 1st stage to 4th stage Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting value.

Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises above the setting value.

These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5 ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive times.

The outputs of both the UF and OF elements are invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.

Figure 2-60 shows the characteristics for the UF and OF elements.

Figure 2-60 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Element

Scheme Logic Figure 2-61 shows the scheme logic for the frequency protection in stage 1. The frequency element FRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The FRQ1 element is programmable for underfrequency or overfrequency operation by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN].

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [FRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal FRQ1 BLOCK.

The stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) use the same logic as that for FRQ1.

58

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1

1

1

1

1 FRQBLK

≥1 FRQ4_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ4 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ4

UF

&

≥1 FRQ3_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ3 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ3

UF

&

≥1 FRQ2_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ2 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ2

UF

&

≥1 FRQ1_TRIP

1 0.00 - 300.00s

TFRQ1 t 0

&

&

& OF

FRQ1

UF

&

"UF" [FRQ1EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ2EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ3EN] +

"OF" ≥1

"UF" [FRQ4EN] +

"OF" ≥1

179

180

181

182

356

357

358

359

183 NON FRQBLK

FRQ1_BLOCK 1600

FRQ2_BLOCK 1601

FRQ3_BLOCK 1602

FRQ4_BLOCK 1603

Figure 2-61 Scheme Logic for Frequency Protection Setting The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks FRQ1 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ1 frequency element setting

TFRQ1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of FRQ1

FRQ2 -10.00 – +10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz -1.00 Hz FRQ2 frequency element setting






FVBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting

FRQ1EN Off / OF / UF Off FRQ1 Enable




59

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.3.2 Frequency rate-of-change DFRQ: 1st stage to 4th stage The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). GRE170 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms), as shown in Figure 2-62 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.

Both D and R elements output is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.

Hz

Δ f

Δ t

sec

Figure 2-62 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element Scheme Logic Stage 2 (FRQ2) to stage 4 (FRQ4) use the same logic as stage 1 FRQ1.

Figure 2-63 shows the scheme logic of the frequency rate-of-change protection in stage 1. The frequency rate-of-change element DFRQ1 can output a trip command under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FRQBLK (FRQBLK=1). The DFRQ1 element is programmable for frequency decay rate or frequency rise rate operation by the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN].

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [DFRQ1EN] or PLC logic signal DFRQ1 BLOCK.

The stage 2 (DFRQ2) to stage 4 (DFRQ4) are the same logic of DFRQ1.

Setting The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks DFRQ1 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 15.0 Hz/s DFRQ1 element setting

DFRQ2 0.1 – 15.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 15.0 Hz/s DFRQ2 element setting



FVBLK 40.0 – 100.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV block setting

DFRQ1EN Off / R / D Off DFRQ1 Enable




60

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1

1

1

1

1 FRQBLK

≥1 DFRQ4_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1 DFRQ3_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1 DFRQ2_TRIP

1

&

&

& &

≥1 DFRQ1_TRIP

1

&

&

& R

DFRQ1

D

&

"D" [DFRQ1EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ2EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ3EN]

+

"R" ≥1

"D" [DFRQ4EN]

+

"R" ≥1

184

185

186

187

360

361

362

363

183 NON FRQBLK

DFRQ1_BLOCK 1576

R DFRQ2

D

R DFRQ3

D

R DFRQ4

D

DFRQ2_BLOCK 1577

DFRQ3_BLOCK 1578

DFRQ4_BLOCK 1579

Figure 2-63 Scheme Logic of Frequency Rate-of-change Protection

Trip Circuit The trip circuit of the frequency protection is configured with the combination of FRQ trip and DFRQ trip. The trip circuit is configured by the PLC function as shown in Figure 2.3.5.

FRQ1 TRIP DFRQ1 TRIP FRQ2 TRIP DFRQ2 TRIP FRQ3 TRIP DFRQ3 TRIP FRQ4 TRIP DFRQ4 TRIP

≥1 FRQ_TRIP 355

≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1

FRQ_S1_TRIP 1680

FRQ_S2_TRIP 1681

FRQ_S3_TRIP 1682

FRQ_S4_TRIP 1683

By PLC

Figure 2-64 Frequency Protection Trip circuit

61

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.4 Trip and Alarm signal output

2.4.1 Trip circuit supervision GRE170 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trips and alarms for each protection. Figure 2-65 shows the overall trip and alarm signals for each protection.

GRE170 provides 4 (model 100/200/300/120/220/320), 10 (model 101/201/301/121/221/321) or 16 (model 102/202/302/122/222/322) auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.7. These auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection outputs by the PLC function.

After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can be programmed by PLC function. The setting is repeated for each output relay.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by monitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the resetting tripping output relay, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker tripping coil current.

OC1 TRIP OC2 TRIP OC3 TRIP EF1 TRIP EF2 TRIP EF3 TRIP

NOC1 TRIP UC1 TRIP THM TRIP OCV1 TRIP OV1 TRIP OV2 TRIP OV3 TRIP UV1 TRIP UV2 TRIP UV3 TRIP ZOV1 TRIP NOV1 TRIP

RP1 TRIP EXST TRIP STRT TRIP LKRT TRIP LOF TRIP MJ TRIP DIF TRIP

≥1 GEN_TRIP

≥1

≥1 371

≥1

≥1

≥1

Figure 2-65 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

62

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

HOC-A TRIP DIF-A TRIP OC1-A TRIP OC2-A TRIP OC3-A TRIP OCV1-A TRIP UC1-A TRIP OV1-A TRIP OV2-A TRIP OV3-A TRIP UV1-A TRIP UV2-A TRIP UV3-A TRIP HOC-B TRIP DIF-B TRIP OC1-B TRIP OC2-B TRIP OC3-B TRIP OVC1-B TRIP UC1-B TRIP OV1-B TRIP OV2-B TRIP OV3-B TRIP UV1-B TRIP UV2-B TRIP UV3-B TRIP HOC-C TRIP DIF-C TRIP OC1-C TRIP OC2-C TRIP OC3-C TRIP OVC1-C TRIP UC1-C TRIP OV1-C TRIP OV2-C TRIP OV3-C TRIP UV1-C TRIP UV2-C TRIP UV3-C TRIP EF1 TRIP EF2 TRIP EF3 TRIP SEF1-S1_TRIP SEF2_TRIP SEF3_TRIP ZOV1_TRIP

≥1 ≥1 GEN_TRIP-A

372

≥1

≥1

≥1 GEN. TRIP-N 375

≥1

GEN_TRIP-B 373

≥1

374 GEN_TRIP-C

≥1

≥1 ≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1 ≥1

Figure 2-66 Tripping and Alarm Outputs1

63

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

OC4 ALARM EF4 ALARM

NOC2 ALARM

UC2 ALARM THM ALARM OCV2 ALARM

OV4 ALARM UV4 ALARM ZOV2 ALARM NOV2 ALARM

RP2 ALARM RSIH ALARM MJ ALARM OC4-A ALARM OCV2-A ALARM UC2-A ALARM OV4-A ALARM UV4-A ALARM OC4-B ALARM OCV2-B ALARM UC2-B ALARM OV4-B ALARM UV4-B ALARM OC4-C ALARM OCV2-C ALARM UC2-C ALARM OV4-C ALARM UV4-C ALARM EF4 ALARM SEF4 ALARM ZOV2 ALARM

GEN_ALARM

≥1

≥1 380

≥1 ≥1 GEN_ALARM-A 381

≥1

≥1

≥1

≥1 ≥1 GEN_ALARM-B 382

≥1

≥1 ≥1 GEN_ALARM-C 383

≥1

≥1 GEN_ALARM-N 384

≥1

Figure 2-67 Tripping and Alarm Outputs 2

2.4.2 Trip Counter Alarm Periodic maintenance of a CB is required for checking the trip circuit, the operation mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of fault current interruptions.

The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for maintenance of the CB:

• Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user

64

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

of the time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM. The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-∗. The default setting is the TP_COUNT and is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.

• Sum of the current breaking quantity ∑Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of CB. The ∑Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time of issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric withstand capability of the oil generally decreases as a function of ∑I2t, and maintenance such as oil changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current interrupted by the CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally set to 2 to monitor the square of the interrupted current. For other circuit breaker types, especially those for HV systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting ∑IyALM. The ∑Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [∑IyAEN].

The counter can be initiated by PLC signals SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C. The default settings for the SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C are assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.

• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if CB operation is slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [OPTAEN].

The CB operating time monitoring feature can be initiated by PLC signals OT_ALARM_A to OT_ALARM_C. The default settings for OT_ALARM_A to OT_ALARM_C are assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.

The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

65

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.5 Mechanical protection 2.5.1 Current differential for machine protection DIF (87M)

Current differential protection DIF provides an overall machine protection deriving phase current from both ends of machine, calculating the differential current on a per phase basis and detecting phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults.

The current differential protection is based on Kirchhoff’s first law that the vector summation of all currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 2-68 shows the principle of current differential protection. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all terminal current of the machine. The differential current (id=i1+i2) is zero because the current (i1) equals current (−i2) during a load condition or an external fault. During an internal fault, the differential current (id) is not zero because the current (i1) does not equal to the current (−i2), and the DIF operates.

DIF

I1 I2

i1 i2 id=i1+i2

Differential current detection

Machine

Primary Secondary

Figure 2-68 Current Differential Protection

Scheme logic Figure 2-69 shows the scheme logic of the current differential protection. Current differential element DIFM comprises sub-elements HOC, DIF, 2f and 5f which operate for differential current on a per phase basis.

Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix K.

HOC is a high-set overcurrent element operating for differential current. It provides high-speed protection for heavy internal faults.

DIF is a percentage restraining element and has dual restraining characteristics, a weak restraint in the small current region and a strong restraint in the large current region, to cope with erroneous differential current which may be caused due to output imbalance of the CTs in case of an external fault.

The DIF output signal can be blocked when the 2f or 5f elements detect second harmonic inrush current during machine energization or fifth harmonic components during machine overexcitation. Blocking is enabled by setting scheme switch [2f-LOCK] or [5f-LOCK] to “ON”. The following two or three blocking schemes are selectable by scheme switch [DIFTPMD].

“3POR”: When any one phase of the 2f or 5f element operates, tripping by the DIF element is blocked in all 3 phases. “3POR” is recommended for big machine whose second harmonic component may be low. Its blocking function is stronger than that of the “1P” below.

“1P”: When any phase of the 2f or 5f elements operate, only the corresponding phase output of the DIF element is blocked.

Protection by DIF and HOC can perform instantaneous three-phase tripping of a breaker. The breaker tripping signal DIFT is enabled or disabled by the scheme switch [DIFTEN] setting.

66

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

DIF-TRIP DIFEN +

& 400

≥1

&

&

&

HOC-A

HOC-B

HOC-C

2F-Lock +

≥1

DIF-A

DIF-B

DIF-C

2F-A

2F-B

2F-C

5F-A

5F-B

5F-C

&

&

&

&

5F-Lock +

DIFM

&

&

≥1

1 ≥1

1 ≥1

1 ≥1

≥1

1

1 &

& &

&

&

DIFTPMD

+ 1P

3POR

414

415

416

402

403

404

408

407

406

410

411

412

&

&

&

1 DIF-A_BLOCK 1696

1 DIF-B_BLOCK 1697

1 DIF-C_BLOCK 1698

405

409

401

&

&

&

413 HOC

DIF

&

&

≥1

≥1

≥1

HOCEN +

&

DIFEN +

&

&

&

&

2F-LOCK

5F-LOCK

DIF-A

DIF-B

DIF-C

HOC-A

HOC-B

HOC-C

0.00 - 10.00s

TDIFHS t 0

0.00 - 10.00s

TDIF t 0

417

&

&

&

DIF-A TRIP

DIF-B TRIP

DIF-C TRIP

&

&

HOC-A TRIP

HOC-B TRIP HOC-C TRIP

HOC-A

HOC-B

HOC-C &

Figure 2-69 Scheme Logic of Current Differential Protection

2.5.1.1 Characteristics of Measuring Elements Percentage Current Differential Element DIF The segregated-phase current differential element DIF has dual percentage restraining characteristics. Figure 2-70 shows the characteristics of DF1 and DF2 on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane. Id is a vector summation of phase current of all windings and Ir is a scalar summation of phase current of all windings.

Id

ik

Ir

Id = 2Ir (one-end infeed)

DF2

DF1

kp ik 2

Figure 2-70 Current Differential Element

DF1characteristic is expressed by the following equation:

Id ≥ p1 Ir + (1 −p1/2) ik

67

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

where,

p1 : slope of DF1

ik : minimum operating current

Id and Ir are defined as follows.

Id = | I1 + I2 |

Ir =(|I1 |+|I2 |)/2

where,

I1 ,I2 : currents of both ends of the machine.

This characteristic has weaker restraint in the small current region and ensures sensitivity to low level faults.

DF2 characteristic is expressed by the following equation:

Id ≥ p2 Ir + (p1 −p2) kp + (1 −p1/2)ik

where,

p2 : slope of DF2

kp : break point of DF1 characteristic

This characteristic has stronger restraint in the large current region and ensures stability against CT saturation during through faults.

High-set Overcurrent Element HOC High-set overcurrent element HOC is an instantaneous overcurrent characteristic, and is applied in the differential circuit. The characteristic is expressed by the following equation:

Id ≥ kh

Id is defined as follows for two-winding transformer.

Id = | I1 + I2 |

HOC is an un-restrained current differential element which can protect a machine against damage due to a heavy internal fault, because it has a simple operation principle and high-speed operation. Note that HOC is not immune to machine inrush currents and therefore cannot be applied with a sensitive setting.

Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions For current differential protection of transformers, GRE170 has a strong restraint characteristic in the large current region for erroneous differential current due to CT saturation. Furthermore, GRE170 provides a CT saturation countermeasure function CTS. The countermeasure provides additional security to cover the condition arising such that if any of the CTs saturate due to a large through-fault current, an apparent differential current can be generated in the differential circuit and may cause false operation of the differential protection.

The CTS function can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSEN].

68

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting The following table shows the setting elements necessary for the current differential protection and their setting ranges. Setting can be performed on the LCD screen or PC screen.


DIF

DIF ik 0.10 − 1.00 (∗) 0.01 0.30 Minimum operating current

p1 10 − 100% 1% 100% % slope of small current region

p2 10 − 200% 1% 200% % slope of large current region

kp 1.00 − 20.00(*) 0.01 1.00 Break point of dual characteristics

k2f 10 − 50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection

k5f 10 − 50% 1% 30% Fifth harmonic detection

TDIF 0.00-10.00s 0.01s 0.00s DIF definite time setting.

HOC kh 2.00 − 20.00(*) 0.01 4.00 High-set overcurrent protection

TDIFHS 0.00-10.00s 0.01s HOC definite time setting.

CT1 1A / 5A 1A CT1 secondary rated current

CT2 1A / 5A 1A CT2 secondary rated current

1CT 1 – 20000A 1A Rated current at primary side

2CT 1 – 20000A 1A Rated current at secondary side

CT1POL Object/Outside Object CT polarity at primary side

CT2POL Object/Outside Object CT polarity at secondary side

Scheme switch

[DIFEN] Off / On Off Enable or disable tripping by DIF element

[HOCEN] Off / On Off Enable or disable HOC element

[DIFTEN] Off / On Enable or disable tripping by DIF element

[DIFTPMD] 3POR / 1P 3POR Trip mode

[2f – LOCK] Off / On On Block by second harmonic

[5f - LOCK] Off / On Off Block by fifth harmonic

[CTSEN] Off / On Off CT saturation function

(*) : Multiplier of CT secondary rated current.

Setting of ik ik determines the minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF element. ik is set as a ratio to the CT secondary rated current.

The minimum sensitivity setting ik is determined from the maximum erroneous differential current under normal operating conditions.

69

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting of p1, p2 and kp Percentage restraining factor (% slope)

= (Differential current) / (Through current)

= (Differential current) / [{(Incoming current) + (Outgoing current)} /2]

p1 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the DIF restraining characteristic in the small current region. The setting is determined by the sum of:

• CT accuracy error (generally considered as 5%)

• Tap error: Error between maximum/minimum tap and the middle tap when taking the middle tap of the tap changer as a reference.

• Matching error: The error due to CT mismatch may be small enough to be neglected in the setting.

• Relay calculation error, and others (5%)

The recommended setting is “Sum of above” × 1.5 (margin).

p2 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the restraining characteristic in the large current region. The setting is determined from the maximum erroneous differential current which is generated when a large through fault current flows.

kp is the break point of the dual percentage restraining characteristics. It is set above the maximum operating current level of the transformer between the maximum forced-cooled rated current and the maximum emergency overload current level, as a ratio to the CT secondary rated current.

Setting of k2f k2f is set to detect the second harmonic content in the inrush current during machine energization and blocks GRE170 to prevent incorrect operation due to the inrush current. A setting of 15% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum second harmonic content.

The threshold current of 2f-Lock element is same as ik setting current.

Setting of k5f k5f is set to detect the fifth harmonic content during machine over-excitation and blocks GRE170 to prevent incorrect operation due to transient over-excitation conditions.

A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum fifth harmonic content.

The threshold current of 5f-Lock element is same as ik setting current.

Setting of kh Kh is the HOC setting and should be set above the estimated maximum inrush current.

The recommended setting is more than “Maximum peak value of Inrush current” × kct.

2.5.2 Mechanical Jam (39) In the case of motor protection, to prevent the sudden stoppage of rotor (lock) with heavy load, two overcurrent relays (MJOC) are applied in positive-sequence in the respective phases. An ON delay timer is used for alarming one of the MJOC. Another ON delay timer is used for tripping in the other MJOC.

The MJOC should be blocked during start-up of the motor. To block the MJOC, there is a

70

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Circuit-breaker-criterion; there are other methods for checking the motor-startup using binary input circuits (BIs). The checking is also done using the PLC. Note that there is a start-delay timer for checking.

With regard to MJOC operation, there are settings for MJAEN (used for alarming) and a setting for MJEN (used for tripping)

Scheme logic

+ "ON"

[MJAEN] 0.00 - 100.00s

&

&

TMJA t 0

t 0

MJ_ALARM

MJ_TRIP

CB CLOSE

1

&

&

686

687

688

689

A

MJ T

+ "ON"

[MJEN]

MOTOR STARTUP

& t 0

0.00 - 60.00s

TBLMJ

Figure 2-71 Scheme logic of Mechanical jam protection

Setting The following table shows the setting elements necessary for the mechanical jam protection and their setting ranges.

Setting Setting range Step Default Remark

MJA 0.1 - 25.0A 0.1A 0.9A Mechanical Jam Alarm current

MJ 0.1 - 25.0A 0.1A 1.2A Mechanical Jam trip current

TBLMJ 0.0 - 60.0s 0.1s 15.0s Start delay timer for Mechanial Jam

TMJA 0.00 - 100.00s 0.01s 5.00s Timer setting of Mechanical Jam Alarm

TMJ 0.00 - 100.00s 0.01s 0.50s Timer setting of Mechanical Jam Trip

[MJAEN] Off / On Off Mechanical Jam Alarm Enable

[MJEN] Off / On Off Mechanical Jam Trip Enable

2.5.3 Locked rotor (51LR) The Locked Rotor protection is a function for protecting the rotor of the motor as opposed to the overload function which protects the stator of the motor.

GRE170 simulates the temperature rises of the stator and rotor independently because each has different thermal characteristics.

For motor currents that are below about 2.5 times the motor rated current, the heat of the motor is produced mainly by the stator, while for higher motor currents, the rotor produces most of the heat.

For this reason, GRE170 performs temperature rise simulation for the rotor as follows,

－ When the motor current is less than 2.5 times the motor rated current (0 < I (t) < 2.5 x IMOT )

The thermal state of the rotor (θr) is made to converge into the thermal state of the stator (θs) by the heating time constant τ1.

71

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The thermal state of the rotor when the motor current is less than 2.5 times the motor rated current can be shown by equation (1).

θr =

−

−11s

τt

eθ (1)

where:

θr = thermal state of the rotor as a percentage,

θs = thermal state of the stator as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,

τ1 = thermal heating time constant of the stator.

－ When the motor current is higher than 2.5 times the motor rated current ( I (t) > 2.5 x IMOT )

From the heating characteristic under locked rotor conditions that is determined by the motor start-up current (Ist; LKRST) and the allowable locked rotor time (Tsc; TLKRT), the temperature rise of the rotor is simulated.

The thermal state of the rotor when the motor current is higher than 2.5 times the motor rated current can be shown by equation (2).

θr = 　　θθｒ tT1

II(t)(0) rm

sc

2

st

⋅⋅⋅

+ (2)

where:

θr = thermal state of the rotor as a percentage,

θr(0) = thermal state of the stator as a percentage when the rotor is locked,

I(t) = motor current,

Ist = motor start-up current,

Tsc = allowable locking time in the cold state,

θrm = percentage of allowable thermal capacity of rotor as a ratio ofθs.

When theθr =θrm the Locked rotor protection operates.

The operation characteristic (operating time) in the locked state varies depending on the heated condition of the motor and the conducting current.

The thermal state of the rotor θr is displayed as THM2 in Digest screen and "Metering" screen, when the motor current is higher than 2.5 times the motor rated current

When starting current is flowing in the locked state, the operating time will be as follows:

(I) In cold condition (motor is cool)

In equation (2), sinceθr (0) = 0 and I(t) = Ist , the operating time is t = Tsc.

(II) In hot condition (motor is running at the rated current (IMOT) for a long period)

In equation (2), sinceθr (0) =θsn and I (t) = Ist , the operating time will be Tsh.

Tsh = 　　θ

θθsc

rm

rm T⋅− sn (3)

where:

72

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Tsh = allowable locked rotor time in hot condition,

θsn = thermal state of the stator at motor rated current (≒ IMOT/THM ×100(%)).

(III) In operating condition

In reality, θr (0) falls between 0 andθsn. The operating time in this case will be given by equation (4).

Top = 　　θ

θθ ｒsc

rm

rm T(0)⋅

− (4)

where:

Top = operating time,

Figure 2-72 shows the IEC 60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings for the Locked Rotor protection characteristic. This chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched onto a system that has previously been loaded to 0% or 90% of its capacity and following setting.

・motor rated current ≒ full load current ・thermal heating time constant of the stator = 10 min. ・motor start-up current ( Ist ) = 5 times motor rated current ・allowable locked rotor time in the cold state ( Tsc ) = 10 sec.

・percentage of allowable thermal capacity of rotor ( θrm ) = 150%

Thermal Curves ( 0% or 90% prior load)

with Locked Rotor Protection

1

10

100

1000

10000

1 10

Overload Current (Multiple of k.IFLC)

Ope

rate

Tim

e (m

inut

es)

Figure 2-72 Thermal Curve with Locked Rotor Protection

0%

90%

73

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Scheme logic

LKRT LKRT TRIP &

"ON"

[LKRTEN] +

677 676

1 LKRT_BLOCK 1643

Figure 2-73 Scheme Logic for Locked Rotor Protection

If the scheme switch of Thermal overload protection [THMEN] or [THMAEN] is disabled, the Locked Rotor protection is NOT available.

Setting The setting elements necessary for the Locked Rotor protection and their setting ranges are as follows:


RTTHM 50 – 500 % 1 % 200 % Rotor allowable thermal capacity

LKRTIS 0.10 – 100.00 A 0.01 A 7.50 A Motor start-up current

TLKRT 1 – 300 s 1 s 20 s Allowable locking time

[LKRTEN] Off / On On Locked rotor protection Enable The rotor allowable thermal capacity setting θrm (RTTHM) is set as a ratio of the thermal state of the stator allowable thermal capacityθs (THM = IAOL: allowable overload current of stator).

Example: Motor full load current is set to the allowable overload current of stator (THM) = 120A Locked rotor current of motor is maximum current when the rotor is locked = 360A Then the setting of allowable thermal capacity of rotorθrm (RTTHM) is 360/120=300(%).

2.5.4 Reverse Power (32) The reverse power protection (RP) is used to prevent damage to motors and can be used to detect reverse power flow in power systems with distributed energy resources.

The reverse power element operates when the level of active power falls below a threshold level and uses an undervoltage element RP-UVBLK to ensure that the system voltage is higher than a pre-determined setting. In order to prevent the operation at motor start up, the reverse power element is blocked according to the CB condition setting [RPCB] and the timer setting [TCBRP∗].

Both RP1 and RP2 have a programmable drop off/pickup (DO/PU) ratio.

Figure 2-74 shows the reverse power element characteristic.

74

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

P(W) 0

RP1

Q(W)

Figure 2-74 RP Element Characteristic

The active power flow direction can be set positive for either power sending or power receiving by setting [Power] when the [RP-Power] is set to “Enable”. When [RP-Power] is set to “Disable”, the active power flow direction is the same as the measurement setting.

The RP protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch [APPLCT] is set to “On” and [APPLVT] is “3PN” or “3PP”.

Scheme Logic Figure 2-75 and Figure 2-76 show the scheme logic for the reverse power protection RP1 and RP2.

The active power flow directional control characteristic can be selected to “Receive” or “Send” by scheme switch setting [Power] and [RP-Power] (not shown in Figures 2-80 and 2-81).

The reverse power elements RP1 and RP2 output RP1 TRIP and RP2 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TRP1 and TRP2.

This protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [RP1EN] and [RP2EN] or PLC signals RP1 BLOCK and RP2 BLOCK. Further this protection can block during the timer setting [TCBRP1] and [TCBRP2] from the “CB CLOSE” signal being detected.

The scheme switches [APPLCT] and [APPLVT] are available in which three-phase or two-phase current protection and three-phase phase-ground or phase to phase voltage protection can be selected. The RP protection is enabled when three-phase or two-phase current and three-phase voltage are introduced and [APPLCT] is set to “On” and [APPLVT] is “3PN” or “3PP”.

1 RP1_BLOCK 1612

RP1 RP1_TRIP &

0.00 - 300.00s

TRP1 t 0

660 661

[RP1-2F + "Block"

ICD &

0.0 - 60.0s

TCBRP1 t 0 CB CLOSE

[RPCB] + "No use"

≥1

+ "ON"

[RP1EN]

Figure 2-75 Reverse Power Protection RP1 Scheme Logic

75

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1 RP2_BLOCK 1613

RP2 RP2_ALARM &

0.00 - 300.00s

TRP2 t 0

662 663

[RP2-2F + "Block"

ICD &

0.0 - 60.0s

TCBRP2 t 0 CB CLOSE

[RPCB] + "No use"

≥1

+ "ON"

[RP2EN]

Figure 2-76 Reverse Power Protection RP2 Scheme Logic

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the RP protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks RP1 −1500.0 – -5.0 W 0.1W −30.0W RP1 threshold setting TRP1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.20 s RP1 definite time setting. TCBRP1 0.0 – 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s RP1 block time setting. Required if [RPCB] = No use. RP1DPR 50 – 98 % 1 % 95 % RP1 DO/PU ratio setting. RP2 −1500.0 – -5.0 W 0.1W −30.0W RP2 threshold setting TRP2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s RP2 definite time setting. TCBRP2 0.0 – 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s RP2 block time setting. Required if [RPCB] = No use. RP2DPR 50 – 98 % 1 % 95 % RP2 DO/PU ratio setting. RPVBLK 40.0 – 100.0 s 0.1 V 40.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting. [RP1EN] Off / On Off RP1 Enable. [RP2EN] Off / On Off RP2 Enable. [RPCB] Use / Nouse Use RPCB block Enable. [RP-UVBLK] Off / On Off UV block enable for RP. [RP-Power] Disable / Enable Disable RP-Power disable. [Power] Send / Receive Send The active power flow direction setting. [APPLVT] Off / 3PN / 3PP / 1P 3PN Three-phase voltage input [APPLCT] Off / On On Three-phase current input

76

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.5.5 Loss of field (40G) The Loss of field protection (LOF) is used to protect the generator from loss of field excitation and step-out protection of synchronized motor. This is a distance relay of offset mho element with maximum sensitivity angle of 270° (V lead θ for I) and the element contains the detecting function for one-phase. After the operation of off delay timer, the function issues a trip signal.

The operating characteristic of the function is shown in the characteristics below.

R

jk

X

Zo

ZG

Operating

range

ZG：Forward setting

(transient reactance (Xd) is set)

Zo：Reverse setting

(a half of the reactance is set)

Characteristic angle: 270 degree

Diameter of the circle

Transient reactance (Xd') minus a half of synchronous reactance

270°

Figure 2-77 Characteristic

When the function trips the CB during the fault condition, the impedance measured is recorded. Note that the measurement impedance is recorded in terms of R and X. (R＝IVcosθ／I2, X＝IVsinθ／I2)

The LOF protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch [APPLCT] is set to “On” and [APPLVT] is “3PN” or “3PP”.

Scheme logic

+ "ON"

[LOFEN]

& TLOF

t 0 LDF_TRIP

1

& 682

683 LOF

0.00-100.0s

LOF_BLOCK 1614

Figure 2-78 Scheme Logic for Loss of field protection

Setting The following table shows the setting elements necessary for the loss of field protection and their setting ranges.

Setting Setting range Steps Default Remark

Z0 1.0 - 20.0Ω 0.1Ω 10.0Ω(*) Reverce setting for LOF

ZG 4.0 - 200.0Ω 0.1Ω 50.0Ω(*) Forward setting for LOF

TLOF 0.00 - 100.00s 0.01s 0.30s LOF timer setting

[LOFEN] Off / On Off LOF Enable (*)This default setting is for 1A rated current.

The following scheme is used in the function.

77

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

2.5.6 Start Protection (50S) The start protection operates when the start-up time exceeds the setting of start protection time (TEXST). The start-up time is defined in section 2.0. The start protection element is shown in Figure 2-79.

The start protection timer pick up is the last time that the current exceeds 150% of motor rated current within the duration of the motor start-up time setting (TMTST). GRE170 determines that the motor is in the start-up state when the start protection time (TEXST) is running even though the start-up time (TMTST) has expired. The start protection timer pick up is shown Figure 2-80.

If the motor current does not exceed 150% of motor rated current during the motor start-up time (TMTST), then the start protection does not operate.

Figure 2-79 Start Protection Characteristic

Figure 2-80 Start Protection timer pick up

Scheme logic

EXST EXST TRIP &

"ON"

[EXSTEN] +

673 672

1 EXST_BLOCK 1641

Figure 2-81 Scheme Logic for Start Protection

78

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting The setting elements necessary for the Start Protection and their setting ranges are as follows:


TEXST 0.1 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Start protection time setting

TMTST 0.1 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Motor Start-up time setting

[EXSTEN] Off / On On Start protection Enable

2.5.7 Thermal Overload Protection The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload protection in GRE170 provides good protection against damage caused by sustained overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal model.

The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).

θ = %10012

2

×

−

−τ

t

AOL

eII

(1)

where:

θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,

I = applied load current,

IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,

τ = thermal time constant of the system.

The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ= 100%.

The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates according to the characteristics defined in IEC 60255-149 amd IEC 60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the implementation of the thermal model for IEC 60255-149 and IEC 60255-8.)

Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.

Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.

The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for ‘cold’ and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is zero, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.

t =τ·Ln

− 22

2

AOLIII

(2)

t =τ·Ln I II I

P

AOL

2 2

2 2−

−

(3)

( )22

21 qIII += (4)

where:

79

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)

I = overload current (amps)

IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)

IP = previous load current (amps)

τ= thermal time constant (seconds)

Ln = natural logarithm

I1 = positive sequence phase current

I2 = negative sequence phase current

q = unbalance factor Note: In general q = 3, for motor and q = 0, for transformer, reacor, cable.

The overlpad curret for THM element is set by [THM-Ieq]. If the [THM-Ieq] set “On”, the overload current use equation (4) current. If the [THM-Ieq] set “Off”, the overload current use largest phase current.

Figure 2-82 shows the IEC60255-149 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously un-loaded system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.

Thermal Curves (Cold Curve -no prior load)

0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

1 10Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)

Ope

rate

Tim

e (m

inut

es)

Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -90% prior load)

0.001

0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

1 10Overload Current (Multiple of

IAOL)

Ope

rate

Tim

e (m

inut

es)

Figure 2-82 Thermal Curves

Scheme Logic Figure 2-83 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.

The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs alarm signal THM_ALARM and trip signal THM_TRIP. The alarm threshold level is set as a

τ

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

τ

100 50

20

10 5 2 1

80

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

percentage of the tripping threshold.

The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMEN] respectively or PLC signals THMA_BLOCK and THM_BLOCK.

T

A THM

& THM_ALARM

+ "ON"

[THMAEN]

+ "ON"

[THMEN]

THM_TRIP &

&

&

107

108

309

310

1 THMA_BLOCK 1573

1 THM_BLOCK 1572

Figure 2-83 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their setting ranges.


THM 0.50 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 1.00 A Thermal overload setting. (THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)

THMIP 0.0 – 5.0 A 0.01 A 0.00 A Previous load current

TTHM 0.5 – 500.0 min 0.1 min 10.0 min Thermal time constant

THMA 50 – 99 % 1 % 80 % Thermal alarm setting. (Percentage of THM setting.)

[THMEN] Off / On Off Thermal OL enable

[THMAEN] Off / On Off Thermal alarm enable

[THM-Ieq] Off / On Off Thermal overload current setting

Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element, and is only active when testing ([THMRST] = “ON”).

2.5.8 Restart Inhibit (66) The Restart Inhibit function prevents the damage to the motor due to repeated mortor starting.

GRE170 has two restart inhibit function, thermal state of rotor function and starts per hour function.

a) Thermal state of rotor function

The Restart Inhibit for thermal state of rotor function detects the start-up current and the start-up time to determine whether the thermal state of the rotor will exceed its allowable thermal capacity when the motor is started. If the allowable thermal state of rotor is exceeded, this protective function issues a lock signal to prevent the motor starting (CB close command).

The rotor heating caused by a single starting operation is expressed by the equation (5).

81

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

　　θrmsc

st

2

st TT

II(t)

⋅⋅

(5)

At start-up I(t) = Ist , then the expression becomes as equation(6),

　　θrmsc

st

TT

⋅ (6)

where:

Tst = motor start-up time, Tsc = allowable locking time in the cold state, θrm = percentage of allowable thermal capacity of rotor, Ist = motor start-up current.

When there is no margin defined in equation (7) between the thermal state of rotor θr and the allowable thermal capacity of rotorθrm , then the output signal of motor starting (CB close) is blocked.

rmsc

strm T

T)( ･θ＋ｔθ≦　θ ｒ (7)

The characteristic of the Restart Inhibit function for thermal state of rotor is shown in Figure 2-84.

Figure 2-84 Restart Inhibit for thermal state of rotor Characteristic

b) Starts per hour function

The Restart Inhibit of starts per hour function is the number of motor start limit within one hour.

It picks up when the number of motor starts exceeds the setting number (Ns). If the allowable starts number for one hour is exceeded, this protective function issues a lock signal to prevent the motor starting (CB close command). The number of starts is still allowed before the maximum, if the function has not picked up.If the function has picked up, the motor start is allowed till one hour has passed since the first motot start-up.

The characteristic of the Restart Inhibit function of starts per hour function is shown in Figure 2-85.

82

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 2-85 Restart Inhibit of starts per hour Characteristic0

Scheme logic

RSIH RSIH ALARM &

"ON"

[RSIHEN] +

679 678

&

1 RSIH_BLOCK 1644

STPH &

"ON"

[STPHEN] +

680

1 STPH_BLOCK 1645

Figure 2-86 Scheme Logic for Restart Inhibit

If the scheme switch of Thermal overload protection [THMEN] or [THMAEN] is disabled, the Restart Inhibit function is NOT available.

Setting The setting elements necessary for the Restart Inhibit and their setting ranges are as follows:


TMTST 0.1 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Motor start-up time setting

TLKRT 1 – 300 s 1 s 20 s Rotor restraint time

RTTHM 50 – 500 % 1 % 200 % Rotor permissible heat range

STPH 1 - 60 1 5 Starts per hour - motor start limit

[RSIHEN] Off / RTHM / STPH STPH Restart inhibit Enable

2.5.9 Motor status monitoring GRE170 model series provides a motor status monitoring function by detection of motor current. In general, a large current flows in a motor during start-up, while less than the motor rated current (IMOT≒Full load current) flows in the running state. The motor status is determined from the ratio of measured current to motor rated current.

The motor status transitions are shown in Figure 2-87.

83

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 2-87 Motor status transition diagram

• Stop state ; When the motor current is less than 5% of motor rated current (IMOT) * * If 5% of motor rated current is smaller than 0.1A, then current of less than 0.1A will be in stop state.

• Start-up state ; From the time when the motor current exceeds 5% of motor rated current (or 0.1A) as it leaves the stop state until the motor current falls below 150% of the motor rated current, in cases where the motor start-up current exceed 150% of the motor rated current, or; the start-up time setting (TMTST) expires in cases where the motor start-up current doesn’t exceed 150% of the motor rated current.

• Running state ; Not during the start-up state, when the motor current is higher than 5% of motor rated current (or 0.1A).

• Overload state ; Not during the start-up state, when the motor current exceeds the operating value for the thermal overload (THM;49) function.


IMOT 0.20 – 10.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A Motor rated current setting

TMTST 0.1 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Motor start-up time setting

[MOTEN] Off / On On Motor function enable The motor status is indicated by the motor status signal as follows signal No.:

600 ; Stop state 601 ; Start-up state 602 ; Running state 603 ; Overload 604; Locked state 605; Emergency start mode

GRE140-700 can detect following the motor parameters. - Peak current during motor start-up - Number of starts (Hot starts , Cold starts and Total starts) - Last motor start-up time - Accumulated Running time

84

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3. Technical Description 3.1 Hardware Description

Outline of Hardware Modules The case outline of GRE170 is shown in Appendix E.

As shown in Figure 3-1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128 x 64dots) with a back-light and displays recording, status and setting data.

There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED Red/Green/Yellow

Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow), the individual status of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.

85

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The TRIP LED and an operated LED, if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user, either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for ‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, whether or not the TRIP LED is lit is controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] by the output of an alarm element such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, and so on.

The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow).

The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicate the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using the ○ and ｜ keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When neither of these LEDs is lit, the CB control function is disabled.

The VIEW key, same as ▼ key, starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The

VIEW key will scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.

The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.

The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in the “MAIN MENU”.

The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input settings or change settings.

The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Figure 3-1 Front Panel

Liquid crystal display

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Control keys Operation keys

USB connector (type B)

86

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.2 Input and Output Signals 3.2.1 Input Signals

AC input signals Table 3-1 shows the AC input signals necessary for each of the GRE170 models and their respective input terminal numbers. See Appendix F for external connections.

Current1 or 2 in the Table indicate both ends of the machine.

Table 3-1 AC Input Signals Terminal No.

AC input element GRE170- 1□0,1□1, 1□2,1□3, 1□4,1□5

GRE170- 2□0,2□1, 2□2,2□3, 2□4,2□5

GRE170- 3□0,3□1, 3□2,3□3, 3□4,3□5

TB4

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8

TB5 1-2 3-4 5-6

TB2 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8

A phase current1 B phase current1 C phase current1 Zero phase current1 A phase current2 B phase current2 C phase current2 A phase voltage input B phase voltage input C phase voltage input Zero phase voltage input

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals The GRE170 provides 6 (Model 100/200/300/400/500), 12 (Model 101/201/301/401/501) or 18 (Model 102/202/302/402/502) programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.

Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change The binary input circuit of the GRE170 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure 3-2. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.

The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and BI2, and to 110V or 220V for the other BIs. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for the other BIs.

87

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at 77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In case of 24V and 48V supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to “Enable”. In case TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.2.3), then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply voltage.

The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change settings are as follow:

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SNS – BI(*)SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm

BITHR1** BI1-2 threshold Voltage 48 / 110 / 220 (12 / 24 / 48 )

110 (24)

BITHR2** BI3-(*) threshold voltage 110 / 220 (24 / 48) 110 (24)

TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off

BI1PUD – BI(*)PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00 BI1DOD – BI(*)DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

(*): The number of binary inputs. The model *00 has 6 binary inputs, The model *01 has 12 binary inputs, the model *02 has 18 binary inputs.

(**)At the PC interface software RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring system), BI threshold voltage settings are indicated by V1, V2 and V3. The V1, V2 and V3 are distinguished with 11th digit of ordering cord for supply voltage, as shown follow.

Supply voltage (11th digt of ordering cord) V1 V2 V3 110 - 220V (-1x-xx) BITH1 48V 110V 220

BITH2 110V 220V - 48 - 110V (-2x-xx) BITH1 24V 48V 110V

BITH2 48V 110V - 12 - 48V (-Ax-xx) BITH1 12V 24V 48V

BITH2 24V 48V -

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between two settings groups. Change of active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 and 2641).

Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signal BIs by setting. When inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD. These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.

88

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(−) (+)

GRE170

[BI2SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1DOD BI1PUD

BI2DOD BI2PUD

BI(*)DOD

0 t

BI(*)PUD

t 0

0 t t 0

0 t t 0

0V

1

[BI(*)SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1

BI2

BI(*)

[BI1SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm" 1

BI1 command

1

BI2 command

1

BI(*) command

[BITHR1]

"110V"

"220V"

"48V"

BI1

BI2

+

+

+

[BITHR2]

"110V"

"220V" +

+

BI3

BI(*)

Figure 3-2 Logic Level Inversion

Function selection The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed earlier Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For setting, refer to next Section “Operation of the User Interface”.

The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix F. All outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relay BOs individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN / CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control switch ○ is linked to BO2 when the control function is enabled.

The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The setting is specific for each output relay.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relay BOs individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or an OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3-3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

89

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off “Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO operates for the TBO set time if the input signal does not continue longer than the TBO set time. If the duration of the input signal exceeds the TBO set time, the BO output is continuous for the input signal time.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit is detected.

Auxiliary relay

0.00 – 10.00s "Dl"

"Lat" S

R F/F

&

Signal List

6 GATES

or

6 GATES ≥1

&

Appendix B ≥1

0 t

+ &

≥

Reset button +

"Dw" [RESET]

&

TBO

IND.RESET 1639 768 BI1_COMMAND

By PLC

Figure 3-3 Configurable Output

Settings The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:

Element Range Step Default Remarks [RESET] Ins / Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,

delayed, dwell or latched. [Logic] OR / AND See Appendix C BO gate logic. TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C BO output timer.

3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function GRE170 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logics on binary signals. The sequence logics with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, NOT logics, etc. can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay elements or binary circuits.

Configurable binary inputs, binary outputs and LEDs, and the initiation trigger of disturbance record are programmed by the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logics or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.

90

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC editor tool. For PLC tool, refer to PLC tool instruction manual.

Figure 3-4 Sample Screen of PLC Tool

3.3 Automatic Supervision 3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal operation by itself, plays an important role. A numerical relay based on microprocessor technology is able to implement such as automatic supervision function. GRE170 implements an automatic supervision function based on the following concept:

• The supervising function should not affect protection performance.

• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

• When a failure occurs, it should be possible to easily identify the failure location.

• Under relay failure detection, CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing The relay is supervised with the following items.

AC input imbalance monitoring The AC current input is monitored such that the following equation is satisfied and the health of the AC input circuit is checked.

• CT circuit current monitoring for [APPLCT] = “3PN” setting

Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) − 4 × Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) ≥ k0

where,

Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic

Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic

k0 = 20% of rated current

91

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuit. This monitoring can be disabled by scheme switch [CT1SVEN] and [CT2SVEN].

A/D accuracy checking An analogue reference voltage is transmitted to a prescribed channel in the analogue-to-digital (A/D) converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Memory monitoring The memories are monitored as follows depending on the type of the memory and checked that the memory circuits are healthy:

• Random access memory monitoring: Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.

• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.

• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancy between the setting values stored in duplicate.

Watchdog Timer A hardware timer which is cleared periodically by software is provided and it is checked that the software is running normally.

DC Supply monitoring The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and checked that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

3.3.3 Failure Alarms When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3-2 summarizes the supervision items and alarms.

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the ▼ key. The event record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The AC input imbalance monitoring alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switches [CT1SVEN] and [CT2SVEN] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and event recording of the failure may not function normally.

92

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Table 3-2 Supervision Items and Alarms Supervision Item LCD

Message LED "IN SERVICE"

LED "ALARM"

LED "Relay fail"

Event record Message

AC input imbalance monitoring

Err:CT1, CT2(1)

On/Off (2) On (3) CT1 err, CT2 err, Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)

A/D accuracy check Err:A/D Off On (3) Relay fail Memory monitoring Err:SUM,

Err:RAM, Err:BRAM,

Err:EEP

Off On (3) Relay fail

Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (3) ---- Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A CB condition monitoring

Trip count alarm ALM:TP COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM,

Relay fail-A Operating time alarm ALM: OP time On On Off OP time ALM, Relay fail-A

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.

(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [CT1SVEN], [CT2SVEN] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".

(3): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates except for DC supply fail condition.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

3.3.4 Trip Blocking When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.

• A/D accuracy check

• Memory monitoring

• Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring function, the scheme switches [CT1SVEN], and [CT2SVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only an alarm is output.

3.3.5 Setting The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks [CT1SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (current1) [CT2SVEN] Off/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM AC input imbalance monitoring (current2)

93

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.4 Recording Function GRE170 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recording

Disturbance recording

These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRE170 or PLC command by user-setting and the following items are recorded for one fault:

Date and time of fault occurrence

Operating phase

Tripping mode

Power system quantities

User configurable initiation

Up to the 8 most-recent faults can be stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs after 8 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and then the record of the latest fault is stored.

Date and time of fault occurrence The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock.

To be precise, this is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated, and thus it is approximately 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault.

Operating phase The operating phase or fault phase can be selected to be displayed following tripping, depending on the requirements of user.

For details, see chapter 2.

Tripping mode This shows the protection scheme that initiated the tripping command.

Power system quantities The following power system quantities for pre-fault and post-fault are recorded at 300A series.

- Magnitude of phase current of both ends (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 Ia2, Ib2, Ic2)

- Magnitude of zero phase current (Ie1)

- Magnitude of symmetrical component current of both ends (I11, I21, I01, I12, I22, I02, I2/ I11, I2/ I12)

- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)

- Magnitude of phase restraining current (Ira, Irb, Irc)

94

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.4.2 Event Recording The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored, the oldest event record is deleted first and then the latest event record is stored.

The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On” (only recording On transitions) or “On/Off” (recording both On and Off transitions) mode by setting. The “On/Off” mode events are specified by the “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger events” is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events is “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events is “On” mode.

The name of an event can be set by RSM100. A maximum of 22 characters can be set, but the LCD displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended that a maximum of 11 characters are set. The set name can be viewed on the Set. (View) screen.

The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below. The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix “G: Relay setting sheet”.


BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events

EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording Disturbance Recording is started when overcurrent starter elements operate or a tripping command is output, or PLC command by user-setting (max. 4: Signal No. 2632 to 2635) is output. The records include 8 analog signals (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, Ie1, Ia2, Ib2, and Ic2), 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal in shown in Appendix B can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record. The default setting of binary signal is shown in Appendix C.

The name of binary signal can be set only by RSM100. Maximum 11 characters can be set and can be viewed on both of the LCD and RSM Setting (view) screen. But the waveform data analysis screen of disturbance record displays up to 11 characters of them. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set.

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software instruction manual.

The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the total for the pre-fault and post-fault recording time is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in Table 3-3.

Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

Table 3-3 Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored Recording time 0.2s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 4.0s 5.0s

50Hz 40 29 19 14 9 7 5

60Hz 40 24 16 12 8 6 5

Note: Recording time = pre-fault recording time + post-fault recording time.

95

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Disturbance recording is initiated when overcurrent elements operate, a tripping signal is output, 2f or 5f element operates or external event signals are input.

The initiations are blocked by the scheme switches.

Settings The elements necessary for starting disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.


Time1 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 2.0 Pre-fault recording time

Time2 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 2.0 Post-fault recording time

OC 0.1-150.0 A 0.01 A 2.00 A Overcurrent detection

EF 0.05-100.0 A 0.01 A 0.60 A Earth fault detection

SEF 0.001-1.000 A 0.001 A 0.200 A Sensitive earth fault detection

NOC 0.10-10.00 A 0.01 A 0.40A Negative sequence overcurrent detection

OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection

UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection

ZOV 1.0-160.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NOV 1.0-160.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.


[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command

[OC] OFF/ON ON Start by OC operation

[EF] OFF/ON ON Start by EF operation

[SEF] OFF/ON ON Start by SEF operation

[NOC] OFF/ON ON Start by NOC operation

[2f] OFF/ON ON Start by 2f operation

[5f] OFF/ON ON Start by 5f operation

[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation

[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation

[ZOV] OFF/ON ON Start by ZOV operation

[NOV] OFF/ON ON Start by NOV operation

96

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.5 Metering Function The GRE170 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The measurement data shown below are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

At 300A model

- Magnitude of phase current of both ends (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, Ia2, Ib2, Ic2)

- Magnitude of zero phase current (Ie1)

Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise) for SEF model

- Magnitude of positive, negative and zero sequence currents (I1, I2, I0)

- Magnitude of symmetrical component current of both ends (I11, I21, I01, I2/ I11, I12, I22, I02, I2/ I12)

- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)

- Magnitude of phase restraining current (Ira, Irb, Irc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude and phase angle of reference voltage for synchronism check (Vs)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

- Active power (P), Reactive power (Q), Apparent power (S), Power factor (PF) - Frequency (f) - Frequency rate of change(df) - Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%) - Direction of each current (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Ise)

Demand - Maximum of phase current of both ends (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, Ia2, Ib2, Ic2: max.)

- Maximum of zero phase current of both ends (Ie : max)

Maximum of zero sequence current from core balance CT (Ise: max) for SEF model

- Maximum of the ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 (I21), I22 (I22), I2/I11(I211), I2/I12(I212): max).

- Maximum and minimum of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc: max, min)

- Maximum and minimum of zero sequence voltage (V0: max, min)

- Maximum and minimum of the system residual voltage (Ve: max, min)

- Maximum of active power (P: max.)

- Maximum of reactive power (Q: max.)

- Maximum of apparent power (S: max.)

- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

97

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

- Maximum and minimum of frequency rate of change (df: max, min)

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side of the CT according to a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio too. For the setting method, see "Setting the parameters" in section 4.2.6.7.

The displayed quantities depend on [APPLCT] settings. Input current greater than 0.01×In (rated current) at the secondary side are required for the measurement.

98

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4. User Interface 4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using either MODBUS communication protocols via the RS485 port.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree for the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel As shown in Figure 3-1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.

LED There are 14 LEDs. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) R / G / Y user-configurable






LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.

LCD The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user with information such as records, status and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing the ENTER key will display

99

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

the main- menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top of the main-menu. If any display is left for about 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will go off.

Operation keys The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

▼ , ▲ , ▲

, ▼

: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical values and text strings.

CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display.

ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing the VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",

"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication". The VIEW key is the same as the ▼ key.

Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and any latched output relays to be released.

Control key The control keys are used for CB control. When the cursor of the LCD display is not at the CB control position-(CB close/open, Local / Remote), the Control key does not function.

○ : Used for CB open operation. When CB is in the open position, the ○ key does not function.

② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When CB is in the closed position, the ｜ key does not function

③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.

USB connector The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.

4.1.2 Communication Ports The following two interfaces are provided as communication ports:

• USB port • RS485 port • IRIG-B port

• Optional Fiber or Ethernet LAN port

100

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

USB port This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting operation and display functions can be performed.

RS485 port The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to construct a network communication system.

The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4-1.

IRIG-B port The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from an external clock to synchronize the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.

This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port Optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to an automation system via an Ethernet communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4-1.

StandardRS485 terminal

TB5 TB4 TB3 TB2 TB1TB6

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

IRIG-B 　Optional Communication Port

SC connector or RJ45

Figure 4-1 Locations of Communication Port in 300A model

101

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2 Operation of the User Interface The user can access functions such as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the LCD display and operation keys.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays Displays during normal operation When the GRE170 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

When the LCD is off press the VIEW key to display the digest screens which are "Indication", "Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and the "Alarm Display" screens in turn. The "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens. To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen for the Latest fault), press the RESET key for 3 seconds or more. For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Indication This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element,

Elements depend upon user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operated (Reset)

Metering

I a 1 * * . * * k A

I b 1 * * . * * k A

I c 1 * * . * * k A

I a 2 * * . * * k A

I b 2 * * . * * k A

I c 2 * * . * * k A

I e 1 * * . * * k A

I d a * . * * p u

I d b * . * * p u

I d c * . * * p u

102

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Latest falut

P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases

D I F : Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and other configurable LEDs if signals are assigned to them triggered by tripping

Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.

Press the RESET key for more than 3s to turn off the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) that have been assigned as latched signals will be triggered by tripping.

To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.

• Press the VIEW key to display the digest screens.

Auto- supervision

E r r : R O M , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM" LED remains lit.

After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off automatically.

If a failure is detected while any of the other screens are being displayed, the current screen remains displayed and the "ALARM" LED lights.

While any of the menu screens are displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.

103

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Alarm Display Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * : A L M 1

Four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.

Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

To clear the Alarm Display, press the RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to ALM4.

4.2.2 Relay Menu Figure 4-2 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRE170. The menu has five sub-menus,"Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see Appendix D.

104

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

MENU Record Fault Event Disturbance Counter Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast Power Para Motor para Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency Set. (change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency Control Password (Ctrl)

Local / Remote CB close/open Test Password (Test)

Switch Binary O/P

Figure 4-2 Relay Menu

105

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Record In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records and disturbance records are displayed or erased.

Status The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, MODBUS, IRIG, clock adjustment and LCD contrast.

Setting (view) The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name, relay address and baud rate in communication, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Setting (change) The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, plant name, relay address and baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Control The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position, the CB control location change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the CB close/open position, the CB control keys ○ and ｜ is enabled. Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Test The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches, to forcibly operate binary output relays.This menu also has password security protection.

When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.

M A I N M E N U

＞ R e c o r d

S t a t u s

S e t . ( v i e w )

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

C o n t r o l

T e s t

To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the VIEW key to turn off the LCD, and then press the ENTER key.

106

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " “, " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.

/ 7 D I F p r o t .

D I F E N _

> D I F E N 1

O f f / O n

H O C E N 1

O f f / O n

D I F T E N 1

O f f / O n

D I F T P M D 0

3 P O R / 1 P

2 f - l o c k 0

O f f / O n

5 f - l o c k 0

O f f / O n

C T S E N 0

O f f / O n

To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix D, press the END or CANCEL key.

The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records and disturbance records.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records To display fault records, do the following:

• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than theエラー! ブックマー

クが定義されていません。 ENTER key.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d

＞ F a u l t

107

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

E v e n t

D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

/ 2 F a u l t

＞ V i e w r e c o r d

C l e a r

• Select "View record" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 F a u l t

＞ ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1

0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

D I F

P h a s e A B C

P r e f a u l t v a l u E s

I a 1 * * * . * * K A

I b 1 * * * . * * K A

I c 1 * * * . * * k A

I e 1 * * * . * * k A

I s e 1 * * . * * * A

I a 2 * * * . * * k A

I b 2 * * * . * * k A

I c 2 * * * . * * k A

108

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

I 1 1 * * . * * * A

I 2 1 * * * . * * k A

I 0 1 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 1 * * . * *

I 1 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 2 * * * . * * k A

I 0 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 2 * * . * *

I d a * * * . * * p u

I d b * * * . * * p u

I d c * * * . * * p u

I r a * * * . * * p u

I r b * * * . * * p u

I r c * * * . * * p u

T H M * * * . * %

V a * * * . * * k V

V b * * * . * * k V

V c * * * . * * k V

V a b * * * . * * k V

V b c * * * . * * k V

V c a * * * . * * k V

V e * * * . * * k V

V p h * * * . * * k V

V 1 * * * . * * k V

V 2 * * * . * * k V

V 0 * * * . * * k V

f * * . * * H z

d f * * . * * H z / s

P F * . * * *

F a u l t v a l u e s

I a 1 * * * . * * k A

I b 1 * * * . * * k A

I c 1 * * * . * * k A

I e 1 * * * . * * k A

I s e * * . * * * A

I a 1 * * * . * * k A

I b 2 * * * . * * k A

I c 2 * * * . * * k A

109

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

I 1 1 * * * . * * k A

I 2 1 * * * . * * k A

I 0 1 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 1 * * . * *

I 1 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 2 * * * . * * k A

I 0 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 2 * * . * *

I d a * * * . * * p u

I d b * * * . * * p u

I d c * * * . * * p u

I r a * * * . * * p u

I r b * * * . * * p u

I r c * * * . * * p u

T H M * * * . * %

V a * * * . * * k V

V b * * * . * * k V

V c * * * . * * k V

V a b * * * . * * k V

V b c * * * . * * k V

V c a * * * . * * k V

V e * * * . * * k V

V p h * * * . * * k V

V 1 * * * . * * k V

V 2 * * * . * * k V

V 0 * * * . * * k V

f * * . * * H z

d f * * . * * H z / s

P F * . * * *

M o t o r p a r a m e t e r

L a s t s t a r t _ u p L

- - - - - - - - -

- - : - - : - - . - - -

T H M 2 * * * . * % T

H o t s t . * * * * * H

C o l d s t . * * * * * C

P e a k s t . * * * . * * k A

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

110

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in back-up RAM.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.

Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units" button which is indicated in the primary side screen.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.


• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 2 E v e n t


C l e a r

• Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 E v e n t

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 4 1 0 0

O C 1 ･ A t r i p O n

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 4 0 9 9

O C 1 ･ A t r i p O N

2 2 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 4 9 8


1 0 / J ｕ l / 2 0 1 4 0 0 3


2 9 / J ｕ n / 2 0 1 4 0 0 2


1 0 / M a y / 2 0 1 4 0 0 1

111

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


The time is displayed by pressing the ▼

key.

/ 3 E v e n t

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0

O C 1 ･ A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 1 1

O C 1 ･ A t r i P O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0


Press the ▲

key to return to the screen with date.


To clear all the event records, do the following:


• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.




• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in back-up RAM.

"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the following sequence.

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.



112

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e


C l e a r

• Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in new-to-old sequence.


♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0


To clear all of the disturbance records, do the following:






• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in back-up RAM.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter



• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 2 C o u n t e r

＞ V i e w c o u n t e r

C l e a r T r i p s

C l e a r T r i p s A (*) C l e a r T r i p s B (*) C l e a r T r i p s C (*)

113

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C l e a r Σ I ^ y A

C l e a r Σ I ^ y B

C l e a r Σ I ^ y C

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

• Select "View Counter" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r

T r i p s * * * * * *

T r i p s A * * * * * * (*) T r i p s B * * * * * * (*) T r i p s C * * * * * * (*) Σ I ^ y A * * * * * * E 6

Σ I ^ y B * * * * * * E 6

Σ I ^ y C * * * * * * E 6

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.


To clear each count, do the following:



• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s ?


• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?


• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?


• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

114

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C l e a r T r i p s C ?


• Select "Clear Σ I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ A ?


• Select "Clear Σ I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ B ?


• Select "Clear Σ I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ C ?


• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in back-up RAM.

4.2.4 Displaying the Status From the sub-menu of "Status", the following statuses can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected machiene

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronisation source

Status of clock adjustment

Status of LCD contrast

Status of Motor parametor

The data are renewed every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

115

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 1 S t a t u s

＞ M e t e r i n g

B i n a r y I / O

R e l a y e l e m e n t

T i m e s y n c .

C l o c k a d j u s t .

L C D c o n t r a s t

M o t o r p a r a .

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

＞ M e t e r i n g

D e m a n d

D i r e c t i o n

• Select “Metering” to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.

At 300A model.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

I a 1 * * * . * * k A

I b 1 * * * . * * k A

I c 1 * * * . * * k A

I e 1 * * * . * * k A

I s e * * . * * * A Display at SEF model.

I a 2 * * . * * * A

I b 2 * * . * * * A

I c 2 * * . * * * A

I 1 1 * * . * * * k A

I 2 1 * * * . * * k A

I 0 1 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 1 * * . * *

I 1 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 2 * * * . * * k A

I 0 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 2 * * . * *

I d a * * * . * * p u

I d b * * * . * * p u

I d c * * * . * * p u

116

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

I r a * * * . * * p u

I r b * * * . * * p u

I r c * * * . * * p u

V a * * * . * * k V

V b * * * . * * k V

V c * * * . * * k V

V a b * * . * * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V b c * * . * * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V c a * * . * * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V e * * . * * * k V

V p h * * . * * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”1PN” setting.

V 1 * * . * * k V

V 2 * * . * * k V

V 0 * * . * * k V

T H M * * * . * %

T H M 2 * * * . * %

ｆ * * . * * H z

d f - * * . * * H z / s

P F - * . * * *

P - * * * * * * k W

Q - * * * * * * k v a r

S - * * * * * * k V A

W h + * * * * * * * k W h

* * * * * * *

W h - * * * * * * * k W h

* * * * * * *

V a h + * * * * * * * k v a h

* * * * * * *

V a h - * * * * * * * k v a h

* * * * * * *

Note: Ia , Ib , Ic for phase current, Ie� for zero phase current I1�, I2�, I0� for symmetrical component current Ida, Idb, Idc for differential current, Ira, Irb, Irc for restraining current

Metering data is expressed as primary values or secondary values depending on the setting. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.6.

Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units" button which is indicated in the primary side screen.

• Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.

117

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 3 D e m e n d

I a 1 m a x * * . * * k A

I b 1 m a x * * . * * k A

I c 1 m a x * * . * * k A

I e 1 m a x * * . * * k A

I 2 1 m a x * * . * * k A

I 2 1 1 m a x * * . * *

I s e m a x * * . * * A Display at SEF model.

I a 2 m a x * * . * * k A

I b 2 m a x * * . * * k A

I c 2 m a x * * . * * k A

I 2 2 M a x * * . * * k A

I 2 1 2 m a x * * . * *

P m a x * * * * * * k W

Q m a x * * * * * * k v a r

S m a x * * * * * * k V A

V a m a x * * * . * * k V

V a m i n * * * . * * k V

V b m a x * * * . * * k V

V b m i n * * * . * * k V

V c m a x * * * . * * k V

V c m i n * * * . * * k V

V a b m a X * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V a b m i n * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V b c m a X * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V b c m i n * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V c a m a X * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V c a m i n * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”3PP” setting.

V e m a x * * * . * * k V

V e m i n * * * . * * k V

V p h m a X * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”1PN” setting.

V p h m i n * * * . * * k V Display at [APPLVT]=”1PN” setting.

V 0 m a x * * * . * * k V

V 0 m i n * * * . * * k V

f m a x * * . * * H z

f m i n * * . * * H z

d f m a x * * . * * H z / s

118

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

d f m a x * * . * * H z / s

To clear all max data, do the following:

• Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r m a x ?


• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in back-up RAM.

• Select "Direction" to display the direction of a current on the "Metering" screen.

The direction of each current is displayed when the directional characteristic is selected as follows:

Ia, Ib, Ic: [OC∗-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting

Ie: [EF∗-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting

Ise: [SE∗-DIR]= "FWD" or "REV" setting

/ 3 D i r e c t i o n

I a 1 F o r w a r d

I b 1 R e v e r s e

I c 1 F o r w a r d

I e 1 F o r w a r d

I s e - - - - - - - Not available for EF model series.

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs To display the binary input and output status, do the following:


• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

For Models 100, 200, 300:

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 ]

F A I L [ 0 ]

119

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

For Models 101, 201, 301:

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 ]

O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

F A I L [ 0 ]

For Models 102, 202, 302:

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I P 3 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 ]

O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P 3 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

F A I L [ 0 ]

The display format is shown below.

[ ] Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Input2(IP2) BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 Input3(IP3) BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 Output2(OP2) BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 Output3(OP3) BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 FAIL FAIL

The row IP shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. In models 100, 200, 300, 120, 220 and 320 BI7 to BI18 are not available, BI13 to BI18 are not available for models 101, 201, 301,121, 221 and 321. For binary input signals, see Appendix B. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit.

The row OP shows the binary output status. BO5 to BO16 are not available for models 100, 200, 300,120, 220 and 320. BO11 to BO16 are not available for models 101, 201, 301,121, 221 and 321.

The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".

FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:


• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.

120

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 2 R y e l e m e n t

D I F # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

D I F # 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O C # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O C # 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

E F [ 0 0 0 0 ]

S E F [ 0 0 0 0 ]

M O T [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

N O C [ 0 0 ]

L O F [ 0 ]

O C V [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

U C [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

T H M [ 0 0 ]

I C D [ 0 0 0 ]

C B F [ 0 0 0 ]

R P [ 0 0 ]

M J [ 0 0 ]

O V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O V # 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

U V # 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

U V # 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

Z O V [ 0 0 ]

N O V [ 0 0 ]

F R Q [ 0 0 0 0 ]

D F R Q [ 0 0 0 0 ]

The display format is as shown below.

[ ]

DIF1 DIF-A DIF-B DIF-C 2f-A 2f-B 2f-C DEF elements

DIF2 5f-A 5f-B 5f-C HOC-A HOC-B HOC-C DEF elements

OC1 OC-1A OC1-B OC1-C OC2-A OC2-B OC2-C OC3-A OC3-B OC3-C OC elements

OC2 OC4-A OC4-B OC4-C OC elements

EF EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4 EF elements

SEF SEF1 SEF2 SEF3 SEF4 SEF elements

MOT EXST STRT LKRT RSIH STPH MOT elements

NOC NOC1 NOC2 NOC elements

LOF LOF1 LOF element

OCV OCV1-A OCV1-B OCV1-C OCV2-A OCV2-B OCV2-C OCV elements

121

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

[ ]

UC UC1-A UC1-B UC1-C UC2-A UC2-B UC2-C UC elements

THM Alarm Trip THM element

ICD ICD-A ICD-B ICD-C ICD element

CBF CBF-A CBF-B CBF-C CBF element

RP RP1 RP2 RP element

MJ MJ-A MJ-T MJ element

OV1 OV1-A OV1-B OV1-C OV2-A OV2-B OV2-C OV3-A OV3-B OV3-C OV elements

OV2 OV4-A OV4-B OV4-C OV elements

UV1 UV1-A UV1-B UV1-C UV2-A UV2-B UV2-C UV3-A UV3-B UV3-C UV elements

UV2 UV4-A UV4-B UV4-C UV elements

ZOV ZOV1 ZOV2 ZOV elements

NOV NOV1 NOV2 NOV elements

FRQ FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FRQ elements

DFRQ DFRQ1 DFRQ2 DFRQ3 DFRQ4 DFRQ elements

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element is in operation.

To display all the lines on the LCD, press the ▲ and ▼ keys.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronization Source The internal clock of the GRE170 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input signal clock, Modbus or IRIG. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the following:


• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.

/ 2 T i m e s y n c .

B I : I n a c t .

* M o d b u s : A c t .

I R I G : I n a c t .

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

122

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.

/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 1

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ] L:Local, B;BI, M;MODBUS, R;IRIG-B

> M i n u t e

0 _

H o u r

0 _

D a y

2 6 _

M o n t h

8 _

Y e a r

2 0 1 4 _

Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is running locally. When [B], [M], [R] is active, the adjustment is invalid.

• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the key. For details on how to enter a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing the CANCEL key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen, do the following:


• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.

/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t

■ ■ ■ ■

• Press the ▲

or ▼

key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by pressing the ▲

key and thicker by pressing the ▼

key.

123

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2.4.7 Motor parameter

GRE170 can display the last start-up time, accumulated running time, Hot / Cold / total start counter and peak current at start-up time, as motor parameters on the LCD.

To display the status of motor parameters on the LCD:


• Select "Motor Para." to display the motor parameter status.

/ 2 M o t o r P a r a .

> V i e w P a r a .

S e t P a r a . .

C l e a r P a r a .

• Select "View Para." to display the view of motor parameter screen.

/ 3 V i e w P a r a .

> T i m e

C o u n t e r .

C u r r e n t

• Select "Time" to display the motor last start-up time and accumulated running time at "View Para." screen.

/ 4 T i m e

L a s t s t a r t _ u p

0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 4

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

R u n n i n g

* * * * 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0

• Select "Counter" to display the motor start-up counter (total, Hot start, Cold start) at "View Para." screen.

/ 4 C o u n t e r

S t a r t ( H + C ) *

H o t s t . * .

C o l d s t . *

• Select "Current" to display the motor start-up current at "View Para." screen.

124

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 4 C u r r e n t

P e a k s t . * A

GRE170 can set the accumulated running time and the Hot / Cold start counter in the case the motor parameters are lost by memory clear etc..

To set the status of motor parameters on the LCD:

• Select "Set Para." to display the set of motor parameter screen.

/ 3 S e t P a r a .

> T i m e

C o u n t e r

• Select "Time" to display the accumulated running time setting screen.

/ 4 R u n n i n g

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0

> M i n u t e

0

H o u r

0 0

• Select "Counter" to display start counter setting screen.

/ 4 C o u n t e r

> H o t s t . *

C o l d s t . *

To clear all motor parameters:

• Select "Clear Para." to display the clear of motor parameter screen.

C l e a r M o t . P a r a . ?


• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all motor parameters stored in back-up RAM.

125

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Relay address and baud rate in Modbus.

Record setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

4.2.5.1 Relay Version To view the relay version, do the following.

• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.

/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )

> V e r s i o n

D e s c r i p t i o n

C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

F r e q u e n c y

• Press "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n

> R e l a y t y p e

S o f t w a r e .

126

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE170-301A-10-10)

G R E 1 7 0 - 3 0 1 A - 1 0

- 1 0

• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version. (ex.;GS1***-**-*)

■ M a i n s o f t w a r e ↓

G S 1 * * * - * * - *

■ P L C d a t a

P G R E 1 7 0 A * * * *

( * * * * * * * * )

4.2.5.2 Settings The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" ,"LED" , "Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Comms

Record

Status

Protection

Binary input

Binary output

LED

Control

Frequency

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION Modification of settings: Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group", "scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.

Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

127

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2.6.1 Setting Method There are three setting methods as follows:

- To enter a selected item

- To enter a text string

- To enter numerical values

To enter a selected item If a screen as shown below is displayed, setting can be performed setting as follows.

The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.

/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )

> P a s s w o r d


C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

F r e q u e n c y

• Move the cursor to a setting item.

• Press the ENTER key.

To enter a text string Text strings are entered under the "Plant name" , "Description" or "Alarm text" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e


A ｌ a r m 1 T e x t




To select a character, use keys ▼ , ▲ , ▲

and ▼

to move the blinking cursor down, up, left and

128

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

right. "→" and "←" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22 characters can be entered.

_

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f

g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

• Set the cursor position in the grid square where you want the text to appear by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.

• Move the blinking cursor to a select the desired character.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the grid square.

• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new character.

• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first step.

To enter numerical values When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed setting as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Press the ▲

or ▼

key to set a desired value. The value is can be raised or powered by pressing the ▲

or ▼

key.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.

The numerical value entered can be modified as follows:

129

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• If the need to change the numerical value is decided before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical value.

• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.

Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and the screen will return to the upper level.

To complete the setting

Enter the settings after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the following steps.

• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen returns to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password For the sake of security of Setting changes password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the " MAIN MENU " screen to display the "Setting change" screen.

• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

• Enter a 4-digit number within the grid square after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the grid square after "Retype".

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

130

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Password trap After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change screens.

If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

Canceling or changing the password To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two grids square on the "Password" screen. The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen. The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE170 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Description To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.

• Select "Set. (change)" on the " MAIN MENU " screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e


A l a r m 1 T e x t

A l a r m 2 T e x t

A l a r m 3 T e x t

A l a r m 4 T e x t

• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.

131

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.

• To enter special items, select "Alarm1 Text" to "Alarm4 Text" on the "Description" screen.

4.2.6.4 Communication If the relay is linked with Modbus communication or Ethernet LAN (optional) an address must be set. Do this as follows:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s

＞ A d d r . / P a r a m .

S w i t c h

• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.

/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m

M o d b u s _

> M o d b u s 2

I E C 0

• Press the ENTER key.

CAUTION: Do not duplicate the relay address number.

• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud rate), etc., of theModbus.

/ 3 S w i t c h

R S 4 8 5 _

> R S 4 8 5 B R 0

9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2

I E C B L K 0

N o r m a l / B l o c k e d

R S 4 8 5 P

O f f / M o d b u s / I E C 1

0 3

• Select the number and press the ENTER key.

132

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

<RS485BR> This line is to select the baud rate when the Modbus system applied.

<IECBLK> Select 1 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC60870-5-103 communication. When using the IEC60870-5-103 communication, select 0 (=Normal).

<RS485P> This line is to select the communication protocol when the MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 system applied.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.

/ 2 R e c o r d

> D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

Setting the disturbance recording



> T i m e / S t a r t e r

S c h e m e s w

• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

O C 2 . 0 0 A

E F 0 . 6 0 A

S E F 0 . 2 0 0 A

N O C 0 . 4 0 A

O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

U V 6 0 . 0 V

Z O V 2 0 . 0 V

N O V 2 0 . 0 V

133

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set whether or not a function is to be used as a starter, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _

> T r i p 1

O f f / O n

O C 1

O f f / O n

E F 1

O f f / O n

S E F 1

O f f / O n

N O C 1

O f f / O n

2 F 1

O f f / O n

5 F 1

O f f / O n

O V 1

O f f / O n

U V 1

O f f / O n

Z O V 1

O f f / O n

N O V 1

O f f / O n

• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

Setting the counter


/ 3 C o u n t e r

> S c h e m e s w

A l a r m s e t

134

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

To set whether or not a counter is to be used, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T C S P E N _

> T C S P E N 1

O f f / O n / O p t - O n

C B S M E N 1

O f f / O n

T C A E N 1

O f f / O n

Σ I y A E N 0

O f f / O n

O P T A E N 1

O f f / O n

• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set the threshold setting, do the following:

• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.

/ 4 A l a r m s e t

T C A L M _

> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0

Σ I y A L M 1 0 0 0 0 E 6

Y V A L U E 2 . 0

O P T A L M 5 0 0 0 m s

• Enter the threshold settings.

4.2.6.6 Status To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

T i m e s y n c .

T i m e z o n e

135

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting the metering

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

D i s p l a y _

> D i s p l a y 0

P r i / S e c / P r i - A

P o w e r 0

S e n d / R e c e i v e

C u r r e n t 1

L a g / L e a d

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).

Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.

Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).

• Enter 0(=Send) or 1(=Receive) for Power, and 0(=Lag) or 1(=Lead) for Current, and press the ENTER key.

Note: Power and Current setting Active Power Display

Power setting=0 (Send) Power setting=1 (Receive)

＋

＋

－

－

V

I

V

I

＋

＋－

－

Setting the time synchronisation The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, I-RIG, SNTP or by using IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.

• Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c . _

> T i m e s y n c . 1

O f f / B I / M o d b u s / I

R I G / I E C 1 0 3 / S N T P

• Enter 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.

Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.

136

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Enter 2(=Modbus) to be synchronised with Modbus.

Enter 3(=IRIG) to be synchronised with IRIG-B time signal.

Enter 4(=IEC103) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.

Enter 5(=SNTP) to be synchronised with SNTP.

Note: When selecting BI, Modbus, IRIG-B, SNTP or IEC60870-5-103, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.

If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” otherwise the repetitive operation of the BI selected will quickly fill the event records (See Section 4.2.6.5.)

If it is set to inactive BI, Modbus, IRIG-B, SNTP or IEC60870-5-103, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone When the calendar clock is synchronized with the SNTP, it is possible to transform GMT to the local time.

• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.

/ 3 T i m e z o n e .

G M T _

> G M T + o h r S

G M T M + O m i n

• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs) and GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.7 Protection The GRE170 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the operation of the power system; one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the following:

• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n

> C h a n g e a c t . g p .

C h a n g e s e t

C o p y g p .

Changing the active group

• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.

137

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .

G p .

A c t I v e g p . _

> A c T i v e g p . 1

• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.

Changing the settings Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:

/ 3 A c t . g p . = 1 .

> C o m m o n

G r o u p 1

G r o u p 2

Changing the Common settings

• Select "Common" to set the current and voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 C o m m o n

A P P L C T _

> A P P L C T 1

O f f / O n

A P P L V T 1

O f f / 3 P N / 3 P P / 1 P N

A P P L V E 0

O f f / O n

C T 1 0

1 A / 5 A

C T 2 1

1 A / 5 A

C T 1 P O L 0

O b j e c t / O u t s i d e

C T 2 P O L 0

O b j e c t / O u t s i d e

C T n 1 0

1 A / 5 A

M O T E N 0

O f f / O n

138

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C T 1 S V E N 0

O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M

C T 2 S V E N


V 0 S V E N


V 2 S V E N 2


A 0 L E D 1

O f f / O n

<APPLCT>

• Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=On: 3 phase) to set the current input state and press the ENTER key.

<APPLVT>

• Enter 0(=Off: not used) , 1(=3PN: 3 phase), 2(=3PP: 3-phase to phase) or 3(=1PN: 1-phase) and press the ENTER key.

<APPLVE>

• Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=Ve: the zero-sequence voltage used is input directly) and press the ENTER key.

<CT1, CT2> To set CT secondary rated current, do the following.

• CT secondary rated current setting. Enter 0(=1A), 1(=5A) and press the ENTER key.

CT1 is input from TB4(Terminal No.), CT2 is input from TB5(Terminal No.).

<CT1POL, CT2POL> To set CT secondary wiring, do the following.

• CT secondary wiring setting. Enter 0(=Object), 1(=) and press the ENTER key.

Refor to section 2.2.4.

<CTn1 > To set zero-phase CT secondary rated current, do the following.

• Zero-phase CT secondary rated current setting. Enter 0(=1A), 1(=5A) and press the ENTER key.

139

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

< CT1SVEN, CT2SVEN,V0SVEN, V2SVEN > To set AC input imbalance supervision enable, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the ▲

or ▼

key and press the ENTER key.

<AOLED> This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.

• Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Changing the Group settings

• Select the "Group∗" on the "Act gp. = *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 G r o u p ＊

> P a r a m e t e r

T r i p

Setting the parameter Enter the line name, the CT ratio and the fault locator as follows:

• Select "Parameter" on the "Group∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.

/ 5 P a r a m e t e r

> L i n e n a m e

C T / V T r a t i o

• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen. • Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key. • Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.

/ 6 C T r a t i o

O C C T _

> 1 C T 4 0 0

2 C T 4 0 0

1 n C T 4 0 0

P V T 1 0 0

V E V T 1 0 0

Note: The "CT/VT ratio" screen depends on the APPLCT and APPLVT setting. • Enter the CT/VT ratio and press the ENTER key.

140

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

<1CT, 2CT, 1nCT> 1CT, 2CT, 1nCT are used to set the CT primary rated current. The CT secondary rated current settings are set in CT1, CT2, and CTn1.

<PVT, VEVT> PVT and VEVT are used to set the VT ratio of the Phase VT and zero-phase VT respectively.

CAUTION Do not set the VT primary rated voltage. Set the VT ratio.

(VT ratio) = (VT primary rated voltage [V]) / (Relay rated voltage [A])

Setting the trip function To set the scheme switches and protection elements do the following.

• Select "Trip" on the "Group∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/ 5 T r i p

> S c h e m e s w

P r o t . e l e m e n t

Setting the scheme switch

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 6 S c h e m e s w

> A p p l i c a t i o n

D I F p r o t

O C p r o t .

E F P r o t .

S E F P r o t .

M o t o r p r o t .

N O C p r o t .

M i s c p r o t

O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z O V p r o t .

N O V p r o t .

F R Q p r o t .

Setting the application To set the application setting, do the following.

• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.

141

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n

M O C 1 _

> M O C 1 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M O C 2 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M E F 1 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M E F 2 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M S E 1 1 Available for SEF model

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C Available for SEF model

M S E 2 1 Available for SEF model

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C Available for SEF model

M O C V 1 1

I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M O C V 2 1

I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M N C 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

M N C 2 1

D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C

<MOC1, 2>, <MEF1, 2>, <MSE1, 2>, <MOCV1, 2>, <MNC1, 2> To set the OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, MOCV1, MOCV2, NOC1 and NOC2 time delay characteristic type, do the following.

• Enter 0(=D: DT) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US) or 4(=C: CON) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the DIF protection The settings for the DIF protection are as follows:

• Select "DIF Prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "DIF prot." screen.

/ 7 D I F p r o t .

D I F E N _

> D I F E N 0

O f f / O n

H O C E N 0

O f f / O n

D I F T E N 0

O f f / O n

142

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

D I F T P M D 0

3 P O R / 1 P

2 f - l o c k 0

O f f / O N

5 f - l o c k 0

O f f / O n

C T S E N 0

O f f / O n

<DIFEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the DIF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the DIF, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<HOCEN> To set the HOC element, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=On) and press the ENTER key.

<DIFTEN > To set the CB operating by DIF function respectively, do the following.


<DIFTPMD> To set the trip mode, do the following.

• Enter 0(=3POR) or 1(=2PAND) or 2(=1P) and press the ENTER key. If the “2PAND” selected, the trip signal is not issued when only one phase element operates.

<2f-lock>, <5f-lock> To set the 2f-lock and 5f-lock Characteristic, do the following.


<CTSEN > To set the CT saturation supervision, do the following.




• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

143

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting the OC protection The settings for the OC protection are as follows:

• Select "OC Prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OC prot." screen.

/ 7 O C P r o t .

O C 1 E N _

> O C 1 E N 1

O f f / O n

O C 1 - D I R 0

F W D / R E V / N O N

M O C 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M O C 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M O C 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

O C 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

D E F / D E P

O C 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

O C 2 E N 0

O f f / O n

O C 2 - D I R 0


M O C 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M O C 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M O C 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

O C 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US)

D E F / D E P

O C 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

O C 3 E N 0

O f f / O n

O C 3 - D I R 0


O C 3 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

144

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O C 4 E N 0

O f f / O n

O C 4 - D I R 0


O C 4 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

O C T P 0

3 P O R / 2 O U T O F 3

<OC∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<OC∗-DIR>

To set the OC∗ directional characteristic, do the following.

• Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.

<MOC1C>, <MOC2C> To set the OC1 and OC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.

• If [MOC∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MOC∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MOC∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.

<OC1R>, <OC2R> To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.

• If [MOC∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.

<OC1-2F>, <OC2-2F>, <OC3-2F>, <OC4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.

<OCTP> To set the trip mode, do the following.

• Enter 0(=3POR) or 1(=2OUTOF3) and press the ENTER key. If the “2OUTOF3” selected, the trip signal is not issued when only one phase element operates.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

145

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4




Setting the EF protection The settings for the EF protection are as follows:

• Select the "EF prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "EF prot." screen.

/ 7 E F P r o t .

E F 1 E N _

> E F 1 E N 1

O f f / O n / P O P

E F 1 - D I R 0


M E F 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M E F 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M E F 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

E F 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

D E F / D E P

E F 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

E F 2 E N 0

O f f / O n / P O P

E F 2 - D I R 0


M E F 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M E F 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M E F 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

E F 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

D E F / D E P

E F 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

146

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

E F 3 E N 0

O f f / O n / P O P

E F 3 - D I R 0


E F 3 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

E F 4 E N 0

O f f / O n / P O P

E F 4 - D I R 0


E F 4 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

<EF∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to use an earth fault protection or enter 2(=POP) to use the directional earth fault command protection (POP scheme), and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<EF∗-DIR>

To set the EF∗ directional characteristic, do the following.

• Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.

<MEF1C>, <MEF2C> To set the EF1 and EF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.

• If [MEF∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MEF∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MEF∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.

<EF1R>, <EF2R> To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.

• If [MEF∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.

<EF1-2F>, <EF2-2F>, <EF3-2F>, <EF4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.

<CURREV> To set which stage is used for current reverse detection in the command protection, do the following.

• Enter 1(=EF1), 2(=EF2), 3(EF3) or 4(=EF4) and press the ENTER key. If disabling them,

147

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the SEF protection The settings for the SEF protection are as follows:

• Select "SEF prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SEF prot." screen.

/ 7 S E F p r o t .

S E 1 E N _

> S E 1 E N 1

O f f / O n

S E 1 - D I R 0


M S E 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC). N I / V I / E I / L T I

M S E 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE). M I / V I / E I

M S E 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US). C O 2 / C O 8

S E 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). D E F / D E P

S E 1 S 2 0

O f f / O n

S E 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

S E 2 E N 0

O f f / O n

S E 2 - D I R 0


M S E 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 1(=IEC). N I / V I / E I / L T I

M S E 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE). M I / V I / E I

M S E 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 3(=US).

148

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

C O 2 / C O 8

S E 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). D E F / D E P

S E 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

S E 3 E N 0

O f f / O n

S E 3 - D I R 0


S E 3 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

S E 4 E N 0

O f f / O n

S E 4 - D I R 0


S E 4 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

Z P E N 0

O f f / O n

<SE∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<MSE1C>, <MSE2C> To set the SEF1 and SEF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.

• If [MSE∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MSE∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MSE∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.

<SE1R>, <SE2R> To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.

• If [MSE∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.

<SE1S2> To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter

149

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<SE1-2F>, <SE2-2F>, <SE3-2F>, <SE4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the SEF1, SEF2, SEF3 and SEF4 against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.

<ZPEN>

To set the zero phase sequence power block enable of SE∗, do the following.

• Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the residual power block function and press the ENTER key. If disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the Motor protection The settings for motor protection are as follows:

• Select "Motor prot." to display the "Motor prot." screen.

/ 7 M o t o r p r o t .

E X S T E N _

> E X S T E N 1

O f f / O N

S T R T E N 0

O f f / O n

L K R T E N 0

O f f / O n

R S I H E N 0

O f f / O n

S T P H E N 0

O f f / O n

<EXSTEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Start Protection and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Start Protection, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

150

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

<STRTEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Stalled Motor Protection and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Stalled Motor Protection, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<LKRTEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Locked Rotor Protection and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Locked Rotor Protection, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

If thermal OL or thermal Alarm is disable, the Locked Rotor Protection is NOT available.

<RSIHEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Restart Inhibit and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Restart Inhibit , enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

If thermal OL or thermal Alarm is disable, the Restart Inhibit is NOT available.

<STPHEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Starts per hour element and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Starts per hour element , enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the NOC. protection The settings for the miscellaneous protection are as follows:

• Select the "NOC. prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOC. prot." screen.

/ 7 N O C P r o t .

N C 1 E N _

> N C 1 E N 0

O f f / O n

M N C 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M N C 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M N C 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

N C 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

D E F / D E P

N C 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

N C 2 E N 0

O f f / O n

M N C 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M N C 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE).

151

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

M I / V I / E I

M N C 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

N C 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

D E F / D E P

N C 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

<NC∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the NC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NC∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<MNC1C>, <MNC2C> To set the NOC1 and NOC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.

• If [MNC∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MNC∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MNC∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.

<NC1R>, <NC2R> To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.

• If [MNC∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.

<NC1-2F>, <NC2-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the NOC1 and NOC2 against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.





Setting the Misc. protection The settings for the miscellaneous protection are as follows:

• Select the "Misc. prot." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc. prot." screen.

/ 7 M i s c P r o t .

L O F E N _

> L O F E N 0

152

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O f f / O n

O C V 1 E N

O f f / C o n t / R e s t

M O C V 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M O C V 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M O C V 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

N O C V 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). D E F / D E P

O C V 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

O C V 2 E N 0

O f f / C o n t / R e s t

M O C V 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I

M O C V 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I

M O C V 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8

N O C V 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). D E F / D E P

O C V 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

O C V T P 0

3 P O R / 2 O U T O F 3

U C 1 E N 0

O f f / O n

U C 2 E N 0

O f f / O n

T H M E N 0

O f f / O n

T H M A E N 0

O f f / O n

T H M - I e q 0

O f f / O n

B T C 0

O f f / O n

R T C 0

153

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O f f / D I R / O C

R P C B 0

U s e / N o u s e

R P - U V B L K 0

N A / B l o c k

R P - P o w e r 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

P o w e r 0

S e n d / R e c e i v e

R P 1 E N 0

O f f / O n

R P 1 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

R P 2 E N 0

O f f / O n

R P 2 - 2 F 0

N A / B l o c k

M J A E N 0

O f f / O n

M J E N 0

O f f / O n

<LOFEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the LOF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the LOF, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<OCV1EN>,< OCV2EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OCV and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OCV, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<MOCV1C>, <MOCV2C> To set the OCV1 and OCV2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.

• If [MOCV∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MOCV∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.

• If [MOCV∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.

<MOCV1R>, <MOCV2R> To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.

154

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• If [MOCV∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.

<OCV1-2F>, <OCV2-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the OCV1 and OCV2 against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.

<OCVTP> To set the trip mode, do the following.

• Enter 0(=3POR) or 1(=2OUTOF3) and press the ENTER key. If the “2OUTOF3” selected, the trip signal is not issued when only one phase element operates.

<UC∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the UC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UC∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<THMEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<THMAEN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<THM-Ieq>

• Enter 1(=On) to use the current by positive sequence current and negatice sequence current for THM culcuration. Enter 0(=Off) to use the maximum phase current for THM culcuration.

<BTC>

• Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<RPCB> To set the RPCB setting , do the following.

• Enter 0(=Use) to enable RP element block by CB Close status and press the ENTER key. If disabling the RPCB, enter 1(=Nouse) and press the ENTER key.

<RP-UVBLK> To set the undervoltage block enable for RP, do the following.

• Enter 1(=Block) to enable "Trip block" by the RP-UVBLK function, and press the ENTER key. If disabling it, enter 0(=NA) and press the ENTER key.

155

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

<RP-Power> To set the RP-Power setting , do the following.

• Enter 1(=Enable) to enable the active power direction setting from [Power] setting and press the ENTER key. If disabling the RP-Power, enter 0(=Disable) and press the ENTER key.

<Power> To set the Power setting , do the following.

• When [RP-Power] is set to 1(=Enable) , enter 1(=Receive) to set the receiving direction setting, or enter 0(=Send) to set the sending direction setting and press the ENTER key

<RP∗EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable RP∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling RP∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<RP1-2F>, <RP2-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block RP1 and RP2 for inrush current, and press the ENTER key.

<MJAEN>, <MJEN> To set the OCD element:

• Enter 1(=On) to enable MJA, MJ and press the ENTER key. If disablingMJA, MJ, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the OV protection The settings for the OV protection are as follows:

• Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .

O V 1 E N _

> O V 1 E N 0

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

O V 2 E N 0


O V 3 E N 0

O f f / O N

156

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O V 4 E N 0

O f f / O N

<OV1EN>, <OV2EN> To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<OV3EN>, <OV4EN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3 or OV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3 or OV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.




• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the UV protection The settings for the UV protection are as follows:

• Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V p r o t .

U V 1 E N _

> U V 1 E N 0


U V 2 E N 0

O F f / D T / I D M T / C

U V 3 E N 0

O f f / O N

U V 4 E N 0

O f f / O N

V B L K E N 0

O f f / O n

<UV1EN>, <UV2EN> To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

157

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

<UV3EN>, <UV4EN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3 or UV4, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3 or UV4, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<VBLKEN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the ZOV protection The settings for the ZOV protection are as follows:

• Select "ZOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.

/ 7 Z O V P r o t .

Z O V 1 E N _

> Z O V 1 E N 0


Z O V 2 E N 0


<ZOV1EN>, <ZOV2EN> To set the ZOV1 and ZOV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the ZOV1 or ZOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the NOV protection The settings for the NOV protection are as follows:

• Select "NOV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOV" screen.

158

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 7 N O V P r o t .

N O V 1 E N _

> N O V 1 E N 0


N O V 2 E N 0


<NOV1EN>, <NOV2EN> To set the NOV1 and NOV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NOV1 or NOV2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the FRQ protection The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:

• Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q P r o t .

F R Q 1 E N _

> F R Q 1 E N 0

O f f / O F / U F

F R Q 2 E N 0

O f f / O F / U F

F R Q 3 E N 0

O f f / O F / U F

F R Q 4 E N 0

O f f / O F / U F

D F R Q 1 E N 0

O f f / R / D

D F R Q 2 E N 0

O f f / R / D

D F R Q 3 E N 0

159

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O f f / R / D

D F R Q 4 E N 0

O f f / R / D

<FRQ∗EN>

To set the FRQ∗ scheme enable, do the following.

• Enter 1(=OF, overfrequency) or 2(=UF, underfrequency) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the FRQ∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<DFRQ∗EN>

To set the FRQ∗ scheme enable, do the following.

• Enter 1(=R, frequency rise rate) or 2(=UF, frequency decay rate) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the FRQ∗, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the protection elements To set the protection elements, do the following.

• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.

/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

> D I F p r o t .

O C p r o t .

E F p r o t .

S E F p r o t .

M o t o r p r o t

N O C p r o t .

M i s c . p r o t

O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z O V p r o t .

N O V p r o t .

F R Q p r o t .

160

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting the Differencial protection function To set the transformer parameter and differential protection function setting, do the following.

• Select "DIF prot." on the "Prot.element" screen to display the "DIF prot." screen.

/ 7 D I F p r o t .

i k _ p u

> i k 1 . 0 5 p u

p 1 8 0 %

p 2 6 0 %

k p 2 . 0 0 p u

k h 1 0 . 0 0 p u

k 2 f 2 0 %

k 5 f 5 0 %

T D I F 0 . 0 0 s

T D I F H S 1 0 . 0 0 s

For details of the transformer parameter setting, refer to 2.2.5.

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.




• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the OC elements

• Select "OC" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OC" screen.

/ 7 O C P r o t .

O C T H _ d e g

> O C T H - 4 5 d e g

O C 1 1 . 0 0 A

T O C 1 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 0(=DT) T O C 1 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T O C 1 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 0(=DT) T O C 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

O C 1 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 4(=C) O C 1 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto

ditto O C 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0

161

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O C 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto

ditto O C 1 - β 0 . 0 0

O C 2 5 . 0 0 A

T O C 2 1 . 0 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 0(=DT) T O C 2 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T O C 2 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 0(=DT) T O C 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). O C 2 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 4(=C) O C 2 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto O C 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O C 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O C 2 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto O C 3 1 0 . 0 0 A

T O C 3 1 . 0 0 s

O C 4 2 0 . 0 0 A

T O C 4 1 . 0 0 s






Setting the EF elements

• Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.

/ 7 E F P r o t .

E F T H _ d e g

> E F T H - 4 5 d e g

E F V 3 . 0 V

E F 1 0 . 3 0 A

T E F 1 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 0(=DT) T E F 1 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T E F 1 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 0(=DT)

T E F 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). E F 1 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 4(=C) E F 1 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto

162

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

E F 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto E F 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto E F 2 3 . 0 0 A

T E F 2 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 0(=DT) T E F 2 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T E F 2 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 0(=DT) T E F 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). E F 2 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 4(=C) E F 2 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto E F 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto E F 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto E F 2 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto E F 3 5 . 0 0 A

T E F 3 1 . 0 0 s

E F 4 1 0 . 0 0 A

T E F 4 1 . 0 0 s

T R E B K 0 . 1 0 s






Setting the SEF elements

• Select "SEF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SEF" screen.

/ 7 S E F P r o t .

S E T H _ d e g

> S E T H - 4 5 d e g

S E V 3 . 0 V

S E 1 0 . 3 0 A

T S E 1 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 0(=DT) T S E 1 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T S E 1 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 0(=DT)

T S E 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

163

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

T S 1 S 2 1 . 0 0 s

S E 2 0 . 0 1 0 A

T S E 2 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 0(=DT) T S E 2 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T S E 2 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 0(=DT) T S E 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). S E 3 0 . 0 1 0 A

T S E 3 1 . 0 0 s

S E 4 0 . 0 1 0 A

T S E 4 1 . 0 0 s

R P 0 . 0 0 W

S E 1 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 4(=C) S E 1 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto S E 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto S E 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto S E 1 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto S E 2 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 4(=C) S E 2 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto S E 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto S E 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto S E 2 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto






Setting the Motor protection

• Select "Motor prot." to display the "Motor prot." screen. This setting is for GRE140-700 model series only.

/ 7 M o t o R p r o t .

I M O T _ A

> I M O T 1 . 0 0 A

T E X S T 0 . 0 s

T M T S T 0 . 0 s

S T R T 0 . 0 0 A

164

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

T S T R T 0 . 0 0 s

L K R T I S 0 . 0 0 A

T L K R T 0 S

R T T H M 2 0 0 %

L I M N U M 6






Setting the NOC. protection elements

• Select "NOC." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOC." screen.

/ 7 M i s c P r o t .

N C 1 _ A

> N C 1 0 . 4 0 A

T N C 1 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 0(=DT) T N C 1 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T N C 1 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 0(=DT) T N C 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). N C 1 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 4(=C)

N C 1 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto N C 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto N C 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto N C 1 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto N C 2 0 . 2 0 A

T N C 2 1 . 0 0 s This setting is displayed if [MNC2] is 0(=DT) T N C 2 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC2] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T N C 2 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MNC2] is 0(=DT) T N C 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). N C 2 - k 0 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MNC2] is 4(=C) N C 2 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto N C 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto N C 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 0 ditto

165

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

N C 2 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto






Setting the Misc. protection elements

• Select "Misc." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Misc." screen.

/ 7 M i s c P r o t .

Z 0 _ Ω

> Z 0 2 0 . 0 Ω

Z G 2 0 0 . 0 Ω

T L O F 1 0 0 . 0 0 s

O C V 1 7 0 . 0 V

O C V 1 I S 1 . 0 0 A

T O C V 1 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV1] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US).

T O C V 1 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOCV 1] is 0(=DT) T O C V 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV 1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). O C V 1 - k 0 . 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV 1] is 4(=C) O C V 1 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto O C V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O C V 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 ditto O C V 1 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto O C V 2 7 0 . 0 V

O C V 2 I S 1 . 0 0 A

T O C V 2 M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 1(=IEC) , 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). T O C V 2 R 0 . 0 s This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 0(=DT) T O C V 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US). O C V 2 - k 0 . 0 0 This setting is displayed if [MOCV2] is 4(=C) O C V 2 - α 0 . 0 0 ditto O C V 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O C V 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 ditto O C V 2 - β 0 . 0 0 ditto U C 1 0 . 2 0 A

166

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

T U C 1 1 . 0 0 s

U C 2 0 . 4 0 A

T U C 2 1 . 0 0 s

T H M 1 . 0 0 A

T H M I P 0 . 0 0 A

T H M Q 3

T T H M 1 0 . 0 m

T T H M 2 1 0 . 0 m

T H M A 8 0 %

I C D - 2 F 1 5 %

I C D O C 0 . 1 0 A

C B F 0 . 5 0 A

T B T C 0 . 5 0 s

T R T C 0 . 4 0 s

R P 1 2 0 . 0 W

R P 1 D P R 9 5 %

T R P 1 1 . 0 0 s

T C B R P 1 0 . 0 s

R P 2 2 0 . 0 W

R P 2 D P R 9 5 %

T R P 2 1 . 0 0 s

T C B R P 2 0 . 0 s

R P V B L K 4 0 . 0 V

M J A 2 5 . 0 A

M J 2 5 . 0 A

T M J A 1 0 0 . 0 0 s

T M J 1 0 0 . 0 0 s

T B L M J 6 0 . 0 s






Setting the OV elements

• Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.

167

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 7 O V P r o t .

O V 1 _ V

> O V 1 1 2 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting. T O V 1 1 . 0 0 s OV1 Definite time delay. T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay. O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 1 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O V 2 1 4 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting. T O V 2 1 . 0 0 s OV2 Definite time delay. T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay. O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting O V 2 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto O V 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto O V 3 1 4 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting. T O V 3 1 . 0 0 s OV3 Definite time delay. O V 3 D P R 9 5 % OV3 DO/PU ratio O V 4 1 4 0 . 0 V OV4 Threshold setting. T O V 4 1 . 0 0 s OV4 Definite time delay. O V 4 D P R 9 5 % OV4 DO/PU ratio





• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the UV elements

• Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.

168

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 7 U V P r o t .

U V 1 _ V

> U V 1 6 0 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting. T U V 1 1 . 0 0 s UV1 Definite time delay. T U V 1 M 1 . 0 0 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T U V 1 R 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay. U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting U V 1 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting. T U V 2 1 . 0 0 s UV2 Definite time delay. T U V 2 M 1 . 0 0 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T U V 2 R 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay. U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting U V 2 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto U V 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto U V 3 4 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting. T U V 3 1 . 0 0 s UV3 Definite time delay. U V 4 4 0 . 0 V UV4 Threshold setting. T U V 4 1 . 0 0 s UV4 Definite time delay. V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold






Setting the ZOV elements

• Select "ZOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZOV" screen.

/ 7 Z O V P r o t .

Z O V 1 _ V

> Z O V 1 2 0 . 0 V ZOV1 Threshold setting. T Z O V 1 1 . 0 0 s ZOV1 Definite time setting.

169

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

T Z O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 ZOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T Z O V 1 R 0 . 0 s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay. Z O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting Z O V 1 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto Z O V 2 4 0 . 0 V ZOV2 Threshold setting. T Z O V 2 1 . 0 0 s ZOV2 Definite time setting. T Z O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 ZOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T Z O V 2 R 0 . 0 s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay. Z O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting Z O V 2 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto Z O V 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto






Setting the NOV protection elements

• Select "NOV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NOV" screen.

/ 7 N O V P r o t .

N O V 1 _ V

> N O V 1 2 0 . 0 V NOV1 Threshold setting. T N O V 1 1 . 0 0 s NOV1 Definite time setting. T N O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 NOV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T N O V 1 R 0 . 0 s NOV1 Definite time reset delay. N O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NOV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting N O V 1 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto

N O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto N O V 2 4 0 . 0 V NOV2 Threshold setting. T N O V 2 1 . 0 0 s NOV2 Definite time setting. T N O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 NOV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T N O V 2 R 0 . 0 s NOV2 Definite time reset delay.

170

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

N O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NOV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting N O V 2 - α 1 . 0 0 ditto N O V 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 ditto






Setting the FRQ elements

• Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q P r o t .

F R Q 1 _ H z

> F R Q 1 - 1 . 0 0 H z

T F R Q 1 1 . 0 0 s

F R Q 2 - 1 . 0 0 H z

T F R Q 2 1 . 0 0 s

F R Q 3 - 1 . 0 0 H z

T F R Q 3 1 . 0 0 s

F R Q 4 - 1 . 0 0 H z

T F R Q 4 1 . 0 0 s

F V B L K 4 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold D F R Q 1 0 . 5 H z s

D F R Q 2 0 . 5 H z s

D F R Q 3 0 . 5 H z s

D F R Q 4 0 . 5 H z s






Setting group copy To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:

171

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.

/ 3 C ｏｐｙ A t o B

> A _

B _

• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.

• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / P

> B I S t a t u s

B I 1

B I 2

B I 3

B I 4

B I 5

B I 6

B I 7 Not available for model xx0 model



B I 1 0 Not available for model xx0 model



B I 1 3 Not available for model xx0 and xx1 model






Setting Binary Input Status GRE170 can select the binary input detection threshold voltage. The threshold voltage supports control voltages of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V.

BI1 and BI2 can be changed between three threshold voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)

BI3 to BI6, BI12 or BI18 can be changed between two threshold voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)

Note: The threshold voltage of 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Surpervision using 2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.

172

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The threshold voltage of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to individual relay models, respectively.

To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:

• Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.

/ 3 B I S t a t u s

B I T H R 1 _

> B I T H R 1 0

4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0

B I T H R 2 0

1 1 0 / 2 2 0

<BITHR1> To set the Binary Input 1 and 2 threshold voltage, do the following.

• Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

<BITHR2> To set the Binary Input 3 to 6, 12 or 18 threshold voltage, do the following.

• Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

Selection of Binary Input

• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.

/ 3 B I ＊

> T i m e r s

F u n c t i o n s

Setting timers

• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.

/ 4 T i m e r s

B I ＊ P U D _ s

> B I ＊ P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting B I ＊ D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key. • After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.

173

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting Functions

• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

B I ＊ S N S _

> B I ＊ S N S 0

N o r m / I n v

• To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.

Each binary input circuit is programmable by PLC function

4.2.6.9 Binary Output All the binary outputs of the GRE170 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix B.

It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

Appendix C shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by pressing the RESET key for longer than 3 seconds.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

For Models 100, 200, 300,120, 220 and 320:

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

For Models 101, 201, 301,121, 221 and 321: / 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

174

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

B O 5

B O 6

B O 7

B O 8

B O 9

B O 1 0

For Models 102, 202, 302,105, 205 and 305: / 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

B O 5

B O 6

B O 7

B O 8

B O 9

B O 1 0

B O 1 1

B O 1 2

B O 1 3

B O 1 4

B O 1 5

B O 1 6

Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗" screen.

/ 3 B O *

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

175

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

R e s e t 0

I n s / D l / D w / L a t

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for longer than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1

I n ♯ 2

I n ♯ 3

I n ♯ 4

I n ♯ 5

I n ♯ 6

T B O 0 . 2 0 s

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 and 487 to 490 (signal names: "BO1 OP" to "BO16 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s). Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.10 LEDs Six LEDs of the GRE170 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION When having changed the LED settings, it is necessary to release the latch state on a digest screen by pressing the RESET key for longer than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

176

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

Selection of real LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6 Not available for [MOTEN] = “On” setting

C B C L O S E D

• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.

/ 4 L E D ＊


F u n c t I o n s

L E D C o l o r

Setting the logic gate type and reset type



L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.

177

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1

I n ♯ 2

I n ♯ 3

I n ♯ 4

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s). • Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Setting the LEDs color

• Select "LED color" on the "LED∗ " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the "LED color" screen.

/ 5 L E D C o l o r

C o l o r _

> C o l o r 0

R / G / Y

• Select the LED colors of red , green or yellow.

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.

Selection of virtual LEDs

• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D

> I N D 1

I N D 2

• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.

178

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/ 4 I N D ＊

> R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing

• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.

/ 5 R e s e t

R e s e t _

> R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for longer than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


B I T 1 _

> B I T 1

B I T 2

B I T 3

B I T 4

B I T 5

B I T 6

B I T 7

B I T 8

• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s). • Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.11 Control The GRE170 can enable the control of Circuit Breakers(CB) open / close using the front panel keys.

The interlock function can block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command by an interlock signal from a binary input signal or a communication command.

179

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

To set the control function and CB interlock function(interlock) , do the following:

• Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 2 C o n t r o l

C o n t r o l _

> C o n t r o l 0


I n t e r l o c k 0


• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select whether or not the control function is to be used and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select whether of not the interlock functions are to be used and press the ENTER key.

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

4.2.6.12 Frequency The GRE170 is provided with a setting to select the system frequency i.e. 50Hz or 60Hz.

• Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.

/ 2 F r e q u e n c y

F r e q u e n c y _

> F r e q u e n c y 0

5 0 H z / 6 0 H z

• Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the ENTER key.

CAUTION When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE170 must reboot to enable the setting change.

4.2.7 Control The sub-menu "Control" enables the CB control function using the front panel keys - ○ , ｜ and L/R .

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

180

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control The "Local/Remote" function provides change of CB control hierarchy.

• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

• Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

> L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

• The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy

4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.

• Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o L

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

> C B c l o s e / o p e n

• The ｜ and ○ keys are enabled to control CB – close / open.

4.2.7.3 Password For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.



C o n t r o l

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

181

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


C o n t r o l

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


"Unmatch passwd!"



If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting (change)" sub-menu screens.

C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

Canceling or changing the password To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two grid square on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.



Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The password protection of the GRE170 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.8 Testing The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring functions and enables the forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If the password trap is set, enter the password in the following screen.

T e s t

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

182

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.

• Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/ 1 T e s t

> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )

S w i t h

B i n a r y O / P

• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

4.2.8.1 Setting the switches The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. prevents tripping from being blocked even in the event of a failure in the items being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

Note: Set the switch [A.M.F] to "Off" before applying the test inputs, when the A.M.F is disabled.

Caution: Be sure to restore these switches after the tests are completed.

/ 2 S w i t h

A . M . F _

> A . M . F 1

O f f / O n

U V T S T 0

O f f / O n

T H M R S T 0

O f f / O n

I E C T S T 0

O f f / O n

S T P H R S T 0

O f f / O n

• Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) to set the reset delay time of the thermal overload element to instantaneous reset for testing (THMRST) and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103

183

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) to set the operating number of the starts per hour element to number reset (STPHRST) and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0

D i S a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 1 6 0


F A I L 0


• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?

E N T R Y = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER key continuously to operate the assigned output relays.

• Release the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

184

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.2.8.3 Password For the sake of security of testing password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.



T e s t

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


T e s t

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


"Unmatch passwd!"



If "TEST" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "TEST" sub-menu screens.

T e s t

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

Canceling or changing the password To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two grids square on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.


185

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE170 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.3 Personal Computer Interface The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel. On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.

• Display of current and voltage waveforms: Oscillograph display

• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span

At the optional communication model, RSM100 can use via Ethernet LAN.

For details, see separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 MODBUS Interface The GRE170 supports the MODBUS communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)

• Measurement data: current

• Status data: events, fault indications, counter, etc.

• Setting data

• Remote CB operation － Open / Close

• Time setting / synchronization

The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

186

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRE170 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used for relay communication when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)

• Measurand data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency

• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.

The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by setting.

For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.

4.6 Clock Function The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

• Event records

• Disturbance records

• Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary time standard input signal, RSM clock, Modbus or IRIG etc. This can be selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).

The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.

Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~499ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the number of seconds is incremented).

When the relays are connected with the RSM system and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all of the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

corrected to (n+1) sec 500ms

n sec (n+1) sec

corrected to n sec

t

187

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4.7 Special Mode The GRE170 shifts to the following special mode by using a specific key operation.

• LCD contrast adjustment mode

• Light check mode

LCD contrast adjustment mode When the LCD is not displayed or not displayed clearly, the contrast adjustment of LCD might not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any screen, do the following:

• Press and , at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to LCD contrast adjustment mode.

L C D C o n t r a s t

■ ■ ■ ■

• Press the or key to adjust the contrast.

LCD and LED check mode To perform a LCD and LED check, do the following.

• Press the key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.

• While pressing the key all LEDs are lit and white dots appear on the whole LCD screen.

The colors of configurable LEDs displayed (LED1-6) are the user setting color.

• Release the key, to finish the LCD and LED check mode.

188

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

5. Installation 5.1 Reciption of Relays

Once the relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay monitoring The relay case is designed for flush mounting using four mounting attachment kits.

Appendix D shows the case outlines.

14

513

5

127

117

Figure 5-1Outline of attachment kit

This attachment kits can be mounted on a panel of thickness 1 – 2.5mm using the M4x8 screws that are included with the realy. When mounted on a panel of thickness 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws and washers should be used.

Flush Mounting For flush mounting in the panel cut-out;

• Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Figure 5-2. • Use the mounting attachment kit set; See Figure 5-3. • Tighten the M4 screw of the attachment kits; see Figure 5-3.

For fixing screws, the allowed range for tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm. Do not tighten the screws very tightly.

189

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 5-2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out

Figure 5-3 Side view of GRE170 with the mounting attachment kit positions

190

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge CAUTION

Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

5.4 Handling Precautions A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potential of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage.

5.5 External Connections External connections are shown in Appendix F.

191

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRE170 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need to include only the hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay can be fully applied.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits function when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces Binary input circuits and output circuits AC input circuits

Function tests These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.

Measuring elements Metering and recording

Conjunctive tests The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external equipment.

The following tests are included in these tests:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check Tripping circuit test

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions CAUTION

• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach the cover provided on top of it.

• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

192

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.2.2 Cautions on Tests CAUTION

• While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit. • Before turning on the power, check the following:

- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct. - Make sure the CT circuit is not open. - Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.

• Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage. • If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source 2 Single-phase current sources 1 Variable-frequency source 1 Combined fundamental and 2nd-harmonic adjustable current supply 1 Combined fundamental and 5th-harmonic adjustable current supply 1 power supply 3 AC voltmeters 1 Phase angle meter 2 AC ammeters 1 Frequency meter 1 Time counter, precision timer 1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the default settings.

For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix B Binary Output Default Setting List Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet

Visual inspection After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings, and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.

193

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Local PC When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100 software is required to run the PC.

For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

6.4 Hardware Tests The tests can be performed without external wiring, but DC power supply and AC voltage and current source are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD ･ LED display

• Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.

Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR:" screen when the supply voltage is applied.

• Press the ▲

key for 3 seconds or more and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and all LEDs are lit.

Operation keys

• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU" screen. Press any key and check that all keys operate.

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-1.

(a) for GRE170-100, 200, 300

GRE170

194

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(b) for GRE170-101, 201, 301

(c) for GRE170-102, 202, 302

Figure 6-1Testing Binary Input Circuit

• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for Model xx0 I P 3 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for Models xx0 and xx1 O P [ 0 0 0 0 ]

O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for Model xx0 O P 3 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for Models xx0 and xx1 F A I L [ 0 ]

• Apply the rated DC voltage to terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , 17, 18, 19, 20 - 22 of terminal block TB6 , terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , … , 23 - 24 of terminal block TB1 for model xx1 or xx2, and terminals 13 - 14, 15 - 16 , … , 23 - 24 of terminal block TB3 for model xx2. Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

GRE170

GRE170

195

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix F.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0


B O 5 0 Not available for Model xx0


ditto

B O 1 0 0 ditto


B O 1 1 0 Not available for Models xx0 and xx1


ditto

B O 1 6 0 ditto


F A I L 0


• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.

196

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

O p e r a t e ?

E N T R Y = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the ENTER key continuously to forcibly operate the output relays.

• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Release the ENTER key to reset the operation

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits This test can be performed by applying known values of voltage and current to the AC input circuits and verifying that the values applied matches with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The testing circuits are shown in Figure 6-2. A three-phase voltage source and a single-phase current source are required.

Figure 6-2 Testing AC Input Circuit (Model 500s)

• Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values on the "Metering switch" screen.

"Settings" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering switch" screen

If the setting is “Display Value = Primary”, change the setting in the "Metering switch" screen. Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

GRE170

197

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen

• Apply AC rated voltages and currents and check that the displayed values are within ± 5% of the input values.

6.5 Function Test

CAUTION The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays. Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1 Measuring Element Measuring element characteristics are realized by the software, so it is possible to verify the overall characteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable LED or a binary output relay.

CAUTION After testing, it is necessary to reset the settings used for testing to the original settings.

In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “On”.

Assigning signal to LED

• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6

C B C L O S E D

Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

Assigning signal to Binary Output Relay

• Select "Binary O/P" in the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

198

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗" screen.

/ 3 B O ∗


F u n c t i o n s



L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s / D l / D w / L a t

• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _

I n ♯ 2 _ _ _

I n ♯ 3 _ _ _

I n ♯ 4 _ _ _

I n ♯ 5 _ _ _

I n ♯ 6 _ _ _

• Assign the gate In #1 to the number corresponding to the testing element by referring to Appendix B, and assign other gates the value “0”.

6.5.1.1 Current differential element DIF The current differential element is checked on the following items

• Operating current value

• Percentage restraining characteristic

199

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Operating time

Note: Set all the settings for DIF appropriately, because the operating value depends on the settings.

Operating current value Minimum operating current value is checked by simulating a one-end infeed. Figure 6-3 shows a testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding.

Figure 6-3 Operating Current Value Test Circuit

The output signal of the testing element is assigned to a configurable LED.

The output signal numbers of the DIF elements are as follows:

Element Signal number

DIF-A 402

DIF-B 403

DIF-C 404

• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at which the element DIF-A operates. Check that the measured value is within 7% of the theoretical operating value. Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (ik setting)

Percentage restraining characteristics The percentage restraining characteristic is tested on the outflow current (Iout) and infeed current (Iin) plane as shown in Figure Figure 6-4. The characteristic shown in Figure 6-4 is equivalent to the one on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane shown inFigure 2-70.

GRE170

200

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Iout

DF2

DF1

ik Iin 0 2+p12 kp +

2−p14 ik

Figure 6-4 Current Differential Element (Iout - Iin Plane)

Figure 6-5 shows a testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding and outflow from a secondary winding.

Figure 6-5 Percentage Restraining Characteristic Test of DIF

• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Apply an infeed current to terminal TB4-1 and TB4-2.

When the infeed current applied is larger than the setting of ik (pu) and smaller than kp(2+p1)/2 + ik(2-p1)/4 (pu), DF1characteristic is checked.

When the infeed current applied is larger than kp(2+ p1)/2 + ik(2- p1)/4 (pu), DF2 characteristic is checked.

GRE170

201

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Note: When the default settings are applied, the critical infeed current which determines DF1 checking or DF2 checking is 1.56× (CT secondary rated current).

• Apply an outflow current of the same magnitude and counterphase with the infeed current to terminal TB5-1 and TB5-2.

• Decrease the out flow current in magnitude and measure the values at which the element operates.

• Check that the measured values are within 7% of the theoretical values.

For DF1characteristic, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation:

Iout = (2−p1)(Iin−ik)/(2+p1) (pu)

where, p1 = slope setting of DF1

ik = minimum operating current setting

When the default settings are applied, Iout = [(Iin−0.3) / 3]× (CT secondary rated current).

For DF2 characteristic, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation.

Iout = [(2−p2)Iin −(2−p1)ik + 2(p2− p1)kp]/(2+ p2) (pu)

where, p2 = slope setting of DF2

kp = break point of DF1 and DF2

When the default settings are applied, Iout = 0.425× (CT secondary rated current).

Operating time The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Operating Time Test

• Set a test current to 3 times of DIF operating current (= CT secondary rated current × ik setting).

• Apply the test current and measure the operating time.

• Check that the operating time is 40 ms or less.

6.5.1.2 2f element The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-7.

GRE170

202

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Figure 6-7 Testing 2f Element

The output signal number of the 2f element is as follows:


2f 405

• Set the second harmonic restraint setting k2f to 15%(= default setting).

• Enter a signal number to observe the 2f output at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Set the fundamental frequency current I1 to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of the second harmonic current I2 and measure the value at which the element operates.

• Calculate the percentage of the second harmonic by I2/I1 when the element operates. Check that the percentage is within 7% of the k2f setting.

GRE170

203

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.5.1.3 5f element

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Testing 5F Element

The output signal number of the 5f element is as follows:


5f 409

• Set the fifth harmonic restraint setting k5f to 30%.(= default setting)

• Enter a signal number to observe the 5f output at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Set the fundamental frequency current I1 to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of the fifth harmonic current I5 and measure the value at which the element operates.

• Calculate the percentage of the fifth harmonic by I5/I1 when the element operates. Check that the percentage is within 7% of the k5f setting.

6.5.1.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC Operating current value The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-3.

The output signal numbers of the HOC elements are as follows:


HOC-A 414

HOC-B 415

HOC-C 416

GRE170

204

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Enter a signal number 414 to observe the HOC-A output as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 7% of the following value.

Operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (kh setting)

Operating time The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6-6.

• Set a test current to 2 times of HOC operating current (= CT secondary rated current × kh setting)

• Apply the test current and measure the operating time.

• Check that the operating time is 35 ms or less.

6.5.2 Protection Scheme In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.

Tripping can be observed by monitoring the tripping command output relays when a simulated fault is applied.

6.5.3 Metering and Recording The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.

There are internal events and external events from binary input commands. Event recording for the external event can be checked by changing the status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as for the binary input circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

205

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.6 Conjunctive Tests 6.6.1 On Load Test

With the relay connected to the line which is carrying a load current, it is possible to check the polarity of the voltage transformer and current transformer and the phase rotation with the metering displays on the LCD screen.

• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen, check that no message appears.

• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

I a 1 * * * . * * k A

I b 1 * * * . * * k A

I c 1 * * * . * * k A

I a 2 * * . * * * A

I b 2 * * * . * * k A

I c 2 * * * . * * k A

I e 1 * * * . * * k A

I 2 / I 1 1 * * . * *

I 2 / I 1 2 * * . * *

I 1 1 * * . * * * A

I 2 1 * * * . * * k A

I 0 1 * * * . * * k A

I 1 2 * * * . * * k A

I 2 2 * * * . * * k A

I 0 2 * * * . * * k A

I d a * * * . * * p u

I d b * * * . * * p u

I d c * * * . * * p u

I r a * * * . * * p u

I r b * * * . * * p u

I r c * * * . * * p u

Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)

• Check that the value is correct.

206

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay and monitoring the breaker that is tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on the "Binary output" screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.

Tripping circuit

• Set the breaker to be closed.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0


B O 5 0 Not available for Model xx0


B O 1 0 0 ditto D i S a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 1 1 0 Not available for Models xx0 and xx1.


ditto

B O 1 6 0 ditto


F A I L 0


BO1 to BO16 are output relays with one normally open contact.

• Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?


207

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

• Continue to press the ENTER key to maintain the operation of binary output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase breaker has tripped.

• Release the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Repeat the above for BOs.

6.7 Maintenance 6.7.1 Regular Testing

The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits which cannot be supervised are binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore regular testing can be minimized to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1 to 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by the supervision, a remote alarm is issued by the binary output relay called FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or on the LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by the supervision can be traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 7-1 shows the LCD messages and failure locations.

The items marked with (1) have a higher probability of being the cause of failure than those items marked with (2).

Table 7-1 LCD Message and Failure Location Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or cable PLC data

Err: SUM ×(Flash memory) Err: ROM ×(ROM data) Err: RAM ×(SRAM) Err: CPU ×(CPU) Err: TskRun × Err: DRIVER × Err: BRAM ×(Backup RAM) Err: EEP ×(EEPROM) Err: A/D ×(A/D converter) Err: SP ×(Sampling) Err: CT1,Err:CT2 × (AC input circuit)(1) × (2) Err: CB × (Circuit breaker)(1) × (2) Err: PLC ×(PLC data)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.

If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.

If a failure is detected by either the automatic supervision functions or by regular testing, replace the

208

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

failed relay unit.

Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during regular testing, confirm the following first: - Test circuit connections are correct. - Modules are securely inserted in position. - Correct DC power supply voltage is applied. - Correct AC inputs are applied. - Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.

Repair at site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level is not recommended.

Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type form) as the relay that is to be replaced.

The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.

Replacing the relay unit CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings including the data related to the

PLC, etc. are restored the original settings.

The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit immediately following the switching off the DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

• Disconnect the trip outputs. • Short-circuit all AC current inputs. Open all AC voltage inputs. • Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring. • To remove the relay unit from the panel, remove the attachments screws. • Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.

CAUTION To avoid risk of damage: • When the attachment kits are removed, be careful to ensure that the relay does not to fall

from panel. • The cover of the relay front panel is closed during operation.

6.7.4 Resumption of Service After replacing the failed relay, follow the procedure below to restore the relay to the service.

• Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the "ALARM" red LED is not lit.

• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but a temperature of 0°C to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

WARNING

209

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

7. Putting Relay into Service The following procedure must be adhered when putting the relay into service after finishing the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.

• Check that all of the external connections are correct.

• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and the clock are correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during the tests.

• Press the ▼ key and check that no failure messages are displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.

• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit.

210

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8 and IEC60255-149

211

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC and EF, each have a programmable reset feature. Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves, inverse time delayed.

Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.

The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent (‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.

An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent.

If a dependent time reset is applied, it attenuate the integrate current, and therefore in the intermittent fault condition operates rapidly.

Figure A-1 illustrates this theory

TRIP LEVEL

TRIP LEVEL

Inverse Time Relay with Instantaneous Reset

Intermittent Fault Condition

Inverse Time Relay with Definite Time Reset

Delayed Reset

Inverse Time Relay with Dependent Time Reset

TRIP LEVEL

212

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8 and -149

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).

θ = II

eAOL

t2

2 1 100−

×−

τ % (1)

where:

θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,

I = applied load current,

IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,

τ = thermal time constant of the system.

The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ = 100%.

If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time

constant τ, as in Figure A-2. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.

Figure A-2

A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves. At IEC60255-149, the overload current is curricurated from positive sequence phase current and negative sequence phase current by equation (3).

t =τ·Ln II IAOL

2

2 2−

(1) ∙∙∙∙∙ Cold curve

θ (%)

t (s)

100%

%100122

×−=

− τθ

t

AOLeI

I

%10022

×AOLI

I

213

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

t =τ·Ln I II I

P

AOL

2 2

2 2−

−

(2) ∙∙∙∙∙ Hot curve

( )22

21 qIII += (3)

where:

t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)

I = overload current (amps)

IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)

IP = previous load current (amps)

τ= thermal time constant (seconds)

Ln = natural logarithm

I1 = positive sequence phase current

I2 = negative sequence phase current

q = unbalance factor

In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.

Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient temperature.

θ (%)

t (s)

100%

Normal Load Current Condition Cooling Curve

Overload Current Condition Trip at 100%

Figure A-3

214

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix B

Signal List

215

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents

0 CONSTANT_0 constant 0 1 CONSTANT_1 constant 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 OC1-A OC1-A relay element output 12 OC1-B OC1-B relay element output 13 OC1-C OC1-C relay element output 14 OC1-A_INST OC1-A relay element start 15 OC1-B_INST OC1-B relay element start 16 OC1-C_INST OC1-C relay element start 17 18 19 20 OC2-A OC2-A relay element output 21 OC2-B OC2-B relay element output 22 OC2-C OC2-C relay element output 23 OC2-A_INST OC2-A relay element start 24 OC2-B_INST OC2-B relay element start 25 OC2-C_INST OC2-C relay element start 26 27 28 29 OC3-A OC3-A relay element output 30 OC3-B OC3-B relay element output 31 OC3-C OC3-C relay element output 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 OC4-A OC4-A relay element output 39 OC4-B OC4-B relay element output 40 OC4-C OC4-C relay element output 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

216

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 EF1 EF1 relay element output 62 EF1_INST EF1 relay element start 63 64 EF2 EF2 relay element output 65 EF2_INST EF2 relay element start 66 67 EF3 EF3 relay element output 68 69 70 EF4 EF4 relay element output 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 SEF1 SEF1 relay element output 81 SEF1_INST SEF1 relay element start 82 83 SEF2 SEF2 relay element output 84 SEF2_INST SEF2 relay element start 85 86 SEF3 SEF3 relay element output 87 SEF3_INST SEF3 relay element start 88 89 SEF4 SEF4 relay element output 90 SEF4_INST SEF4 relay element start 91 92 ZPF Residual power forward element 93 ZPR Residual power reverse element 94 UC1-A UC1-A relay element output 95 UC1-B UC1-B relay element output 96 UC1-C UC1-C relay element output 97 UC2-A UC2-A relay element output 98 UC2-B UC2-B relay element output 99 UC2-C UC2-C relay element output

100 ICD-A Inrush current detector 101 ICD-B Inrush current detector 102 ICD-C Inrush current detector

217

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 103 104 105 106 107 THM-A THERMAL Alarm relay element output 108 THM-T THERMAL Trip relay element output 109 110 NOC1 NOC1 relay element output 111 NOC1_INST NOC1 relay element start 112 113 NOC2 NOC2 relay element output 114 NOC2_INST NOC2 relay element start 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 CBF-A CBF-A relay element output 124 CBF-B CBF-B relay element output 125 CBF-C CBF-C relay element output 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output 141 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output 142 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output 143 OV1-A_INST OV1-A relay element start 144 OV1-B_INST OV1-B relay element start 145 OV1-C_INST OV1-C relay element start 146 OV2-A OV2-A relay element output 147 OV2-B OV2-B relay element output 148 OV2-C OV2-C relay element output 149 OV2-A_INST OV2-A relay element start 150 OV2-B_INST OV2-B relay element start 151 OV2-C_INST OV2-C relay element start 152 OV3-A OV3-A relay element output 153 OV3-B OV3-B relay element output 154 OV3-C OV3-C relay element output 155 OV4-A OV4-A relay element output

218

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 156 OV4-B OV4-B relay element output 157 OV4-C OV4-C relay element output 158 159 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output 160 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output 161 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output 162 UV1-A_INST UV1-A relay element start 163 UV1-B_INST UV1-B relay element start 164 UV1-C_INST UV1-C relay element start 165 UV2-A UV2-A relay element output 166 UV2-B UV2-B relay element output 167 UV2-C UV2-C relay element output 168 UV2-A_INST UV2-A relay element start 169 UV2-B_INST UV2-B relay element start 170 UV2-C_INST UV2-C relay element start 171 UV3-A UV3-A relay element output 172 UV3-B UV3-B relay element output 173 UV3-C UV3-C relay element output 174 UV4-A UV4-A relay element output 175 UV4-B UV4-B relay element output 176 UV4-C UV4-C relay element output 177 178 UVBLK UV blocked element operating 179 FRQ1 FRQ1 relay element ouput 180 FRQ2 FRQ2 relay element ouput 181 FRQ3 FRQ3 relay element ouput 182 FRQ4 FRQ4 relay element ouput 183 FRQBLK FRQ blocked element operating 184 DFRQ1 DFRQ1 relay element ouput 185 DFRQ2 DFRQ2 relay element ouput 186 DFRQ3 DFRQ3 relay element ouput 187 DFRQ4 DFRQ4 relay element ouput 188 189 ZOV1 ZOV1 relay element ouput 190 ZOV1_INST ZOV1 relay element start 191 ZOV2 ZOV2 relay element ouput 192 ZOV2_INST ZOV2 relay element start 193 NOV1 NOV1 relay element ouput 194 NOV1_INST NOV1 relay element start 195 NOV2 NOV2 relay element ouput 196 NOV2_INST NOV2 relay element start 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 OC-A_DIST OC-A relay for disturbance record 204 OC-B_DIST OC-B relay for disturbance record 205 OC-C_DIST OC-C relay for disturbance record 206 EF_DIST EF relay for disturbance record 207 SEF_DIST SEF relay for disturbance record 208 NOC_DIST NOC relay for disturbance record

219

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 209 OV-A_DIST OV-A relay for disturbance record 210 OV-B_DIST OV-B relay for disturbance record 211 OV-C_DIST OV-C relay for disturbance record 212 UV-A_DIST UV-A relay for disturbance record 213 UV-B_DIST UV-B relay for disturbance record 214 UV-C_DIST UV-C relay for disturbance record 215 ZOV_DIST ZOV relay for disturbance record 216 NOV_DIST NOV relay for disturbance record 217 218 219 220

251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 OC1_TRIP OC1 trip command 262 OC1-A_TRIP OC1 trip command (A Phase) 263 OC1-B_TRIP OC1 trip command (B Phase) 264 OC1-C_TRIP OC1 trip command (C Phase) 265 OC2_TRIP OC2 trip command 266 OC2-A_TRIP OC2 trip command (A Phase) 267 OC2-B_TRIP OC2 trip command (B Phase) 268 OC2-C_TRIP OC2 trip command (C Phase) 269 OC3_TRIP OC3 trip command 270 OC3-A_TRIP OC3 trip command (A Phase) 271 OC3-B_TRIP OC3 trip command (B Phase) 272 OC3-C_TRIP OC3 trip command (C Phase) 273 OC4_ALARM OC4 alarm command 274 OC4-A_ALARM OC4 alarm command (A Phase) 275 OC4-B_ALARM OC4 alarm command (B Phase) 276 OC4-C_ALARM OC4 alarm command (C Phase) 277 278 279 280 281 EF1_TRIP EF1 trip command 282 EF2_TRIP EF2 trip command 283 EF3_TRIP EF3 trip command 284 EF4_ALARM EF4 alarm command 285 286 287 288 289

220

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 290 291 SEF1-S1_TRIP SEF1 Stage1 trip command 292 SEF1-S2_TRIP SEF1 Stage2 trip command 293 SEF2_TRIP SEF2 trip command 294 SEF3_TRIP SEF3 trip command 295 SEF4_ALARM SEF4 alarm command 296 297 298 299 300 301 UC1_TRIP UC1 trip command 302 UC1-A_TRIP UC1 trip command (A Phase) 303 UC1-B_TRIP UC1 trip command (B Phase) 304 UC1-C_TRIP UC1 trip command (C Phase) 305 UC2_ALARM UC2 alarm command 306 UC2-A_ALARM UC2 alarm command (A Phase) 307 UC2-B_ALARM UC2 alarm command (B Phase) 308 UC2-C_ALARM UC2 alarm command (C Phase) 309 THM_ALARM Thermal alarm command 310 THM_TRIP Thermal trip command 311 NOC1_TRIP NOC1 trip command 312 NOC2_ALARM NOC2 alarm command 313 314 CBF_RETRIP CBF retrip command 315 CBF_RETRIP-A CBF retrip command(A Phase) 316 CBF_RETRIP-B CBF retrip command(B Phase) 317 CBF_RETRIP-C CBF retrip command(C Phase) 318 CBF_TRIP CBF back trip command 319 CBF_TRIP-A CBF back trip command(A Phase) 320 CBF_TRIP-B CBF back trip command(B Phase) 321 CBF_TRIP-C CBF back trip command(C Phase) 322 CBF_OP-A CBF start signal (A phase) 323 CBF_OP-B CBF start signal (B phase) 324 CBF_OP-C CBF start signal (C phase) 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 OV1_TRIP OV1 trip command 332 OV1-A_TRIP OV1 trip command(Phase-A) 333 OV1-B_TRIP OV1 trip command(Phase-B) 334 OV1-C_TRIP OV1 trip command(Phase-C) 335 OV2_TRIP OV2 trip command 336 OV2-A_TRIP OV2 trip command(Phase-A) 337 OV2-B_TRIP OV2 trip command(Phase-B) 338 OV2-C_TRIP OV2 trip command(Phase-C) 339 340 341 UV1_TRIP UV1 trip command 342 UV1-A_TRIP UV1 trip command(Phase-A)

221

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 343 UV1-B_TRIP UV1 trip command(Phase-B) 344 UV1-C_TRIP UV1 trip command(Phase-C) 345 UV2_TRIP UV2 trip command 346 UV2-A_TRIP UV2 trip command(Phase-A) 347 UV2-B_TRIP UV2 trip command(Phase-B) 348 UV2-C_TRIP UV2 trip command(Phase-C) 349 350 351 ZOV1_TRIP ZOV1 trip command 352 ZOV2_ALARM ZOV2 alarm command 353 NOV1_TRIP NOV1 trip command 354 NOV2_ALARM NOV2 alarm command 355 FRQ_TRIP FRQ trip command 356 FRQ1_TRIP FRQ1 trip command 357 FRQ2_TRIP FRQ2 trip command 358 FRQ3_TRIP FRQ3 trip command 359 FRQ4_TRIP FRQ4 trip command 360 DFRQ1_TRIP DFRQ1 trip command 361 DFRQ2_TRIP DFRQ2 trip command 362 DFRQ3_TRIP DFRQ3 trip command 363 DFRQ4_TRIP DFRQ4 trip command 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 GEN.TRIP General trip command 372 GEN.TRIP-A General trip command (A Phase) 373 GEN.TRIP-B General trip command (B Phase) 374 GEN.TRIP-C General trip command (C Phase) 375 GEN.TRIP-N General trip command (N Phase) 376 377 378 379 380 GEN.ALARM General alarm command 381 GEN.ALARM-A General alarm command (A Phase) 382 GEN.ALARM-B General alarm command (B Phase) 383 GEN.ALARM-C General alarm command (C Phase) 384 GEN.ALARM-N General alarm command (N Phase) 385 386 387 388 389 CB_CLOSE CB closed status 390 CB_OPEN CB opened status 391 392 393 394 DIF-NBLK-A DIF non-block trip command (A Phase) 395 DIF-NBLK-B DIF non-block trip command (B Phase)

222

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 396 DIF-NBLK-C DIF non-block trip command (C Phase) 397 CT-SAT-A CT saturation state (A Phase) 398 CT-SAT-B CT saturation state (B Phase) 399 CT-SAT-C CT saturation state (C Phase) 400 DIF-TP DIF element output 401 DIF Dif element output 402 DIF-A Dif element output (A Phase) 403 DIF-B Dif element output (B Phase) 404 DIF-C Dif element output (C Phase) 405 2f-LOCK 2f lock state 406 2f-A 2f detection (A phase) 407 2f-B 2f detection (B phase) 408 2f-C 2f detection (C phase) 409 5f-LOCK 5f lock state 410 5f-A 5f detection (A phase) 411 5f-B 5f detection (B phase) 412 5f-C 5f detection (C phase) 413 HOC HOC element output 414 HOC-A HOC element output (A Phase) 415 HOC-B HOC element output (B Phase) 416 HOC-C HOC element output (C Phase) 417 DIF-TRIP DIF trip command 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 OV3_TRIP OV3 trip command 432 OV3-A_TRIP OV3 trip command(Phase-A) 433 OV3-B_TRIP OV3 trip command(Phase-B) 434 OV3-C_TRIP OV3 trip command(Phase-C) 435 OV4_ALARM OV4 alarm command 436 OV4-A_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-A) 437 OV4-B_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-B) 438 OV4-C_ALARM OV4 alarm command(Phase-C) 439 UV3_TRIP UV3 trip command 440 UV3-A_TRIP UV3 trip command(Phase-A) 441 UV3-B_TRIP UV3 trip command(Phase-B) 442 UV3-C_TRIP UV3 trip command(Phase-C) 443 UV4_ALARM UV4 alarm command 444 UV4-A_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-A) 445 UV4-B_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-B) 446 UV4-C_ALARM UV4 alarm command(Phase-C) 447 OC1-OR OC1 relay (3PHASE OR) 448 OC2-OR OC2 relay (3PHASE OR)

223

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 449 OC3-OR OC3 relay (3PHASE OR) 450 OC4-OR OC4 relay (3PHASE OR) 451 OC1_INST-OR OC1_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 452 OC2_INST-OR OC2_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 453 UC1-OR UC1 relay (3PHASE OR) 454 UC2-OR UC2 relay (3PHASE OR) 455 CBF-OR CBF relay (3PHASE OR) 456 OV1-OR OV1 relay (3PHASE OR) 457 OV2-OR OV2 relay (3PHASE OR) 458 OV3-OR OV3 relay (3PHASE OR) 459 OV4-OR OV4 relay (3PHASE OR) 460 OV1_INST-OR OV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 461 OV2_INST-OR OV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 462 UV1-OR UV1 relay (3PHASE OR) 463 UV2-OR UV2 relay (3PHASE OR) 464 UV3-OR UV3 relay (3PHASE OR) 465 UV4-OR UV4 relay (3PHASE OR) 466 UV1_INST-OR UV1_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 467 UV2_INST-OR UV2_INST relay (3PHASE OR) 468 ICD-OR ICD (3PHASE OR) 469 470 471 BO1_OP Binary output 1 472 BO2_OP Binary output 2 473 BO3_OP Binary output 3 474 BO4_OP Binary output 4 475 BO5_OP Binary output 5 476 BO6_OP Binary output 6 477 BO7_OP Binary output 7 478 BO8_OP Binary output 8 479 BO9_OP Binary output 9 480 BO10_OP Binary output 10 481 BO11_OP Binary output 11 482 BO12_OP Binary output 12 483 BO13_OP Binary output 13 484 BO14_OP Binary output 14 485 BO15_OP Binary output 15 486 BO16_OP Binary output 16 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 DIFT-DIF-TRIP DIFT-DIF TP 501 DIFT-HOC-TRIP DIFT-HOC TP

224

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 502 DIFT-TRIP DIFT TRIP 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 OC1-A_RST OC1-A relay element definite time reset 533 OC1-B_RST OC1-B relay element definite time reset 534 OC1-C_RST OC1-C relay element definite time reset 535 OC2-A_RST OC2-A relay element definite time reset 536 OC2-B_RST OC2-B relay element definite time reset 537 OC2-C_RST OC2-C relay element definite time reset 538 OC3-A_RST OC3-A relay element definite time reset 539 OC3-B_RST OC3-B relay element definite time reset 540 OC3-C_RST OC3-C relay element definite time reset 541 OC4-A_RST OC4-A relay element definite time reset 542 OC4-B_RST OC4-B relay element definite time reset 543 OC4-C_RST OC4-C relay element definite time reset 544 EF1_RST EF1 relay element definite time reset 545 EF2_RST EF2 relay element definite time reset 546 EF3_RST EF3 relay element definite time reset 547 EF4_RST EF4 relay element definite time reset 548 SEF1_RST SEF1 relay element definite time reset 549 SEF2_RST SEF2 relay element definite time reset 550 SEF3_RST SEF3 relay element definite time reset 551 SEF4_RST SEF4 relay element definite time reset 552 NOC1_RST NOC1 relay element definite time reset 553 NOC2_RST NOC2 relay element definite time reset 554

225

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 555 556 OV1-A_RST OV1-A relay element definite time reset 557 OV1-B_RST OV1-B relay element definite time reset 558 OV1-C_RST OV1-C relay element definite time reset 559 OV2-A_RST OV2-A relay element definite time reset 560 OV2-B_RST OV2-B relay element definite time reset 561 OV2-C_RST OV2-C relay element definite time reset 562 UV1-A_RST UV1-A relay element definite time reset 563 UV1-B_RST UV1-B relay element definite time reset 564 UV1-C_RST UV1-C relay element definite time reset 565 UV2-A_RST UV2-A relay element definite time reset 566 UV2-B_RST UV2-B relay element definite time reset 567 UV2-C_RST UV2-C relay element definite time reset 568 569 UVBLK-A UV blocked element operating 570 UVBLK-B UV blocked element operating 571 UVBLK-C UV blocked element operating 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 OCV1-A OCV1 element output (A Phase) 592 OCV1-B OCV1 element output (B Phase) 593 OCV1-C OCV1 element output (C Phase) 594 OCV1_TRIP OCV1 trip command 595 OCV1-A_TRIP OCV1 trip output (A Phase) 596 OCV1-B_TRIP OCV1 trip output (B Phase) 597 OCV1-C_TRIP OCV1 trip output (C Phase) 598 OCV2-A OCV2 element output (A Phase) 599 OCV2-B OCV2 element output (B Phase) 600 OCV2-C OCV2 element output (C Phase) 601 OCV2_TRIP OCV2 trip command 602 OCV2-A_TRIP OCV2 trip output (A Phase) 603 OCV2-B_TRIP OCV2 trip output (B Phase) 604 OCV2-C_TRIP OCV2 trip output (C Phase) 605 606 OCV1-OR OCV1 trip output (3PHASE OR) 607 OCV2-OR OCV2 trip output (3PHASE OR)

226

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 608 609 610 OC1-A_DEPRST OC1-A relay element IDMT dependent time reset 611 OC1-B_DEPRST OC1-B relay element IDMT dependent time reset 612 OC1-C_DEPRST OC1-C relay element IDMT dependent time reset 613 EF1_DEPRST EF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 614 SEF1_DEPRST SEF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 615 NOC1_DEPRST NOC1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 616 OC2-A_DEPRST OC2-A relay element IDMT dependent time reset 617 OC2-B_DEPRST OC2-B relay element IDMT dependent time reset 618 OC2-C_DEPRST OC2-C relay element IDMT dependent time reset 619 EF2_DEPRST EF2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 620 SEF2_DEPRST SEF2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 621 NOC2_DEPRST NOC2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 OCV1-A_INST OCV1-A relay element start 641 OCV1-B_INST OCV1-B relay element start 642 OCV1-C_INST OCV1-C relay element start 643 OCV1-A_DEPRST OCV1-A relay element IDMT dependent time reset 644 OCV1-B_DEPRST OCV1-B relay element IDMT dependent time reset 645 OCV1-C_DEPRST OCV1-C relay element IDMT dependent time reset 646 OCV1-A_DEFRST OCV1-A relay element IDMT definite time reset 647 OCV1-B_DEFRST OCV1-B relay element IDMT definite time reset 648 OCV1-C_DEFRST OCV1-C relay element IDMT definite time reset 649 OCV2-A_INST OCV2-A relay element start 650 OCV2-B_INST OCV2-B relay element start 651 OCV2-C_INST OCV2-C relay element start 652 OCV2-A_DEPRST OCV2-A relay element IDMT dependent time reset 653 OCV2-B_DEPRST OCV2-B relay element IDMT dependent time reset 654 OCV2-C_DEPRST OCV2-C relay element IDMT dependent time reset 655 OCV2-A_DEFRST OCV2-A relay element IDMT definite time reset 656 OCV2-B_DEFRST OCV2-B relay element IDMT definite time reset 657 OCV2-C_DEFRST OCV2-C relay element IDMT definite time reset 658 659 660 RP1 RP1 relay element output

227

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 661 RP1_TRIP RP1 trip command 662 RP2 RP2 relay element output 663 RP2_ALARM RP2 alarm command 664 665 666 MSTP_STATE Motor stop state 667 MSTRT_STATE Motor start-up state 668 MRUN_STATE Motor running state 669 MOL_STATE Motor overload state 670 MLOCK_STATE Motor locked rotor state 671 MEMR_STATE Emergency Re-start state 672 EXST Start protection element output 673 EXST_TRIP Start protection trip output 674 STRT Stalled motor protection element output 675 STRT_TRIP Stalled motor trip output 676 LKRT Locked rotor protection element output 677 LKRT_TRIP Locked rotor protection trip output 678 RSIH Restart Inhibit element output 679 RSIH_ALARM Restart Inhibit alarme output 680 STPH Starts per hour 動作 681 682 LOF-AB Loss of Field relay element output 683 LOF-BC Loss of Field relay element output 684 LOF-CA Loss of Field relay element output 685 LOF_TRIP Loss of Field trip command 686 MJ-A Mechanical jam Alarm relay element output 687 MJ-T Mechanical jam Trip relay element output 688 MJ_ALARM Mechanical jam alarm command 689 MJ_TRIP Mechanical jam trip command 690 691 LOF-AB_TRIP Loss of Field relay element trip command 692 LOF-BC_TRIP Loss of Field relay element trip command 693 LOF-CA_TRIP Loss of Field relay element trip command 694 LOF-OR LOF relay (3PHASE OR) 695 696 697 698 699 700

750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760

228

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1 769 BI2_COMMAND Binary input signal BI2 770 BI3_COMMAND Binary input signal BI3 771 BI4_COMMAND Binary input signal BI4 772 BI5_COMMAND Binary input signal BI5 773 BI6_COMMAND Binary input signal BI6 774 BI7_COMMAND Binary input signal BI7 775 BI8_COMMAND Binary input signal BI8 776 BI9_COMMAND Binary input signal BI9 777 BI10_COMMAND Binary input signal BI10 778 BI11_COMMAND Binary input signal BI11 779 BI12_COMMAND Binary input signal BI12 780 BI13_COMMAND Binary input signal BI13 781 BI14_COMMAND Binary input signal BI14 782 BI15_COMMAND Binary input signal BI15 783 BI16_COMMAND Binary input signal BI16 784 BI17_COMMAND Binary input signal BI17 785 BI18_COMMAND Binary input signal BI18 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 E_FAULT_L1 A phase earth fault signal for IEC103 801 E_FAULT_L2 B phase earth fault signal for IEC103 802 E_FAULT_L3 C phase earth fault signal for IEC103 803 E_FAULT_FWD Earth fault forward signal for IEC103 804 E_FAULT_REV Earth fault reverse signal for IEC103 805 PICKUP_L1 A phase element pick-up for IEC103 806 PICKUP_L2 B phase element pick-up for IEC103 807 PICKUP_L3 C phase element pick-up for IEC103 808 PICKUP_N Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103 809 810 811 812 813

229

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 814 815 816 FAULT_FWD Forward fault for IEC103 817 FAULT_REV Reverse fault for IEC103 818 CBF_TP_RETP CBF trip or CBF retrip for IEC103 819 IDMT_OC_TRIP Inverse time OC trip for IEC103 820 DT_OC_TRIP Definite time OC trip for IEC103 821 IDMT_EF_TRIP Inverse time earth fault OC trip for IEC103 822 DT_EF_TRIP Definite time earth fault OC trip for IEC103 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850

1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013

230

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 FAULT_PHA_A fault_phase_A 1041 FAULT_PHA_B fault_phase_B 1042 FAULT_PHA_C fault_phase_C 1043 FAULT_PHA_N fault_phase_N 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050

1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked 1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode 1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active

231

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1244 GROUP2_ACTIVE group2 active 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE 1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK 1253 AMF_OFF SV BLOCK 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 RELAY_FAIL-A 1259 IEC_RLY_FAIL-A 1260 1261 TRIP-H Trip signal hold 1262 CT1_ERR_UF CT1 error(unfiltered) 1263 CT2_ERR_UF CT2 error(unfiltered) 1264 V0_ERR_UF V0 error(unfiltered) 1265 V2_ERR_UF V2 error(unfiltered) 1266 CT1_ERR CT1 error 1267 CT2_ERR CT2 error 1268 V0_ERR V0 error 1269 V2_ERR V2 error 1270 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure 1271 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure 1272 TC_ALARM Trip counter alarm 1273 SGM_Iy_ALM ΣIY alarm 1274 OT_ALARM Operate time alarm 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered) 1285 BI2_COM_UF Binary input signal BI2 (unfiltered) 1286 BI3_COM_UF Binary input signal BI3 (unfiltered) 1287 BI4_COM_UF Binary input signal BI4 (unfiltered) 1288 BI5_COM_UF Binary input signal BI5 (unfiltered) 1289 BI6_COM_UF Binary input signal BI6 (unfiltered) 1290 BI7_COM_UF Binary input signal BI7 (unfiltered) 1291 BI8_COM_UF Binary input signal BI8 (unfiltered) 1292 BI9_COM_UF Binary input signal BI9 (unfiltered) 1293 BI10_COM_UF Binary input signal BI10 (unfiltered) 1294 BI11_COM_UF Binary input signal BI11 (unfiltered) 1295 BI12_COM_UF Binary input signal BI12 (unfiltered) 1296 BI13_COM_UF Binary input signal BI13 (unfiltered)

232

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1297 BI14_COM_UF Binary input signal BI14 (unfiltered) 1298 BI15_COM_UF Binary input signal BI15 (unfiltered) 1299 BI16_COM_UF Binary input signal BI16 (unfiltered) 1300 BI17_COM_UF Binary input signal BI17 (unfiltered) 1301 BI18_COM_UF Binary input signal BI18 (unfiltered) 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320

1400 1401 LOCAL_OP_ACT local operation active 1402 REMOTE_OP_ACT remote operation active 1403 NORM_LED_ON IN-SERVICE LED ON 1404 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON 1405 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON 1406 RYFAIL_LED_ON RELAY FAIL LED ON 1407 1408 PRG_LED_RESET Latched programmable LED RESET 1409 LED_RESET TRIP LED RESET 1410 1411 1412 1413 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command 1414 PRG_LED1_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON 1415 PRG_LED2_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED2 ON 1416 PRG_LED3_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED3 ON 1417 PRG_LED4_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED4 ON 1418 PRG_LED5_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED5 ON 1419 PRG_LED6_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED6 ON 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426

233

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1427 1428 1429 1430 LCD_IND. VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command 1431 LCD_IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command 1432 LCD_IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command 1433 1434 1435 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear 1436 E.Record_CLR Event record clear 1437 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear 1438 Data_Lost Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error 1439 TP_COUNT_CLR Trip counter cleared 1440 1441 1442 DEMAND_CLR Demand cleared 1443 1444 1445 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change 1446 IEC103_data_CHG IEC-103 data change 1447 1448 Sys.set_change System setting change 1449 Rly.set_change Relay setting change 1450 Grp.set_change Group setting change 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed) 1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed) 1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed) 1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed) 1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed) 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 RTC_err RTC stopped 1467 1468 1469 1470 PLC_err PLC stopeed 1471 1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error 1473 1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error 1475 BU_RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error 1476 1477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error 1478 1479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error

234

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1480 CPU_err Program error 1481 1482 Tsk_run_err Tsk stopped 1483 Sampling_err Sampling error 1484 DIO1_err DIO1 card connection error 1485 DIO2_err DIO2 card connection error 1486 1487 ROM_data_err Romdata error 1488 1489 1490 LKRT-A Locked rotor protection alarm output 1491 RSIH-A Restart inhibit alarm output 1492 LOCK_RSIH CB operation blocked by Restart inhibit element 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 Set._LOCAL Setting LOCAl 1501 Set._REMOTE Setting REMOTE 1502 LOCAL_OP_CMD LOCAL OPEN COMMAND 1503 LOCAL_CL_CMD LOCAL CLOSE COMMAND 1504 RMT_OP_CMD_B REMOTE OPEN COMMAND(BI) 1505 RMT_CL_CMD_B REMOTE CLOSE COMMAND(BI) 1506 RMT_OP_CMD_C REMOTE OPEN COMMAND(COMM) 1507 RMT_CL_CMD_C REMOTE CLOSE COMMAND(COMM) 1508 CTRL_LOCK_B CONTROL LOCK(BI) 1509 CTRL_LOCK_C CONTROL LOCK(COMM) 1510 CB_OPEN_OP CB OPEN OPERATE 1511 CB_CLOSE_OP CB CLOSE OPERATE 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532

235

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1533 1534 1535 1536 OC1_BLOCK OC trip block command 1537 OC2_BLOCK ditto 1538 OC3_BLOCK ditto 1539 OC4_BLOCK ditto 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 EF1_BLOCK EF trip block command 1545 EF2_BLOCK ditto 1546 EF3_BLOCK ditto 1547 EF4_BLOCK ditto 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 SEF1_BLOCK SEF trip block command 1553 SEF2_BLOCK ditto 1554 SEF3_BLOCK ditto 1555 SEF4_BLOCK ditto 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 NOC1_BLOCK NOC trip block command 1561 NOC2_BLOCK ditto 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 UC1_BLOCK UC trip block command 1569 UC2_BLOCK ditto 1570 CBF_BLOCK CBF trip block command 1571 1572 THM_BLOCK THM trip block command 1573 THMA_BLOCK ditto 1574 1575 1576 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ trip block command 1577 DFRQ2_BLOCK ditto 1578 DFRQ3_BLOCK ditto 1579 DFRQ4_BLOCK ditto 1580 DIF_BLOCK DIF trip block command 1581 OCV1_BLOCK OCV trip block command 1582 OCV2_BLOCK ditto 1583

236

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1584 OV1_BLOCK OV trip block command 1585 OV2_BLOCK ditto 1586 OV3_BLOCK ditto 1587 OV4_BLOCK ditto 1588 UV1_BLOCK UV trip block command 1589 UV2_BLOCK ditto 1590 UV3_BLOCK ditto 1591 UV4_BLOCK ditto 1592 ZOV1_BLOCK ZOV trip block command 1593 ZOV2_BLOCK ditto 1594 1595 1596 NOV1_BLOCK NOV trip block command 1597 NOV2_BLOCK ditto 1598 1599 1600 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ trip block command 1601 FRQ2_BLOCK ditto 1602 FRQ3_BLOCK ditto 1603 FRQ4_BLOCK ditto 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 RP1_BLOCK RP1 trip block command 1613 RP2_BLOCK RP2 trip block command 1614 LOF_BLOCK Loss of fileld block command 1615 MOTOR_STARTUP MJ trip block command 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 TC_FAIL Trip circuit Fail Alarm commamd 1633 CB_N/O_CONT CB N/O contact commamd 1634 CB_N/C_CONT CB N/C contact commamd

237

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 IND.RESET Indication reset command 1640 1641 EXST_BLOCK Start protection block state 1642 STRT_BLOCK Stalled motor protection block state 1643 LKRT_BLOCK Locked rotor protection block state 1644 RSIH_BLOCK Restart Inhibit block state 1645 STPH_BLOCK Starts per hour block state 1646 SPEED_SW Speed switch input 1647 EMRSTRT Emetgency start input 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 CBF_INIT-A CBF initiation command (Phase A) 1661 CBF_INIT-B B 1662 CBF_INIT-C C 1663 CBF_INIT CBF initiation command 1664 TP_COUNT-A Trip counter count up command 1665 TP_COUNT-B ditto 1666 TP_COUNT-C ditto 1667 TP_COUNT ditto 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 SGM_IY-A Sigma IY counter count up command 1673 SGM_IY-B ditto 1674 SGM_IY-C ditto 1675 1676 OT_ALARM-A Operating alarm start commnad 1677 OT_ALARM-B ditto 1678 OT_ALARM-C ditto 1679 1680 FRQ_S1_TRIP Frequency scheme trip command (Stage1) 1681 FRQ_S2_TRIP Frequency scheme trip command (Stage2) 1682 FRQ_S3_TRIP Frequency scheme trip command (Stage3) 1683 FRQ_S4_TRIP Frequency scheme trip command (Stage4) 1684 1685

238

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 DIF-A_BLOCK 1694 DIF-B_BLOCK 1695 DIF-C_BLOCK 1696 OC1_INST_TP OC1 instantly trip command 1697 OC2_INST_TP OC2 instantly trip command 1698 OC3_INST_TP OC3 instantly trip command 1699 OC4_INST_TP OC4 instantly trip command 1700 EF1_INST_TP EF1 instantly trip command 1701 EF2_INST_TP EF2 instantly trip command 1702 EF3_INST_TP EF3 instantly trip command 1703 EF4_INST_TP EF4 instantly trip command 1704 SEF1_INST_TP SEF1 instantly trip command 1705 SEF2_INST_TP SEF2 instantly trip command 1706 SEF3_INST_TP SEF3 instantly trip command 1707 SEF4_INST_TP SEF4 instantly trip command 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720

2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 CONTROL_LOCK_BI CONTROL LOCK(BI) 2305 REMOTE_OP_CMD REMOTE OPEN COMMAND 2306 REMOTE_CL_CMD REMOTE CLOSE COMMAND 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313

239

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320

2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 DISP.ALARM1 Indicate the alarm display 2561 DISP.ALARM2 ditto 2562 DISP.ALARM3 ditto 2563 DISP.ALARM4 ditto 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 SYNC_CLOCK Synchronise clock commamd 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591

240

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 ALARM_LED_SET Alarm LED set 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1 2625 F.RECORD2 Fault record stored command 2 2626 F.RECORD3 Fault record stored command 3 2627 F.RECORD4 Fault record stored command 4 2628 2629 EVENT1 2630 EVENT2 2631 EVENT3 2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1 2633 D.RECORD2 Disturbance record stored command 2 2634 D.RECORD3 Disturbance record stored command 3 2635 D.RECORD4 Disturbance record stored command 4 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed command (Change to group1) 2641 SET.GROUP2 Active setting group changed command (Change to group2) 2642

241

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 CON_TPMD1 User configurable trip mode in fault record 2657 CON_TPMD2 ditto 2658 CON_TPMD3 ditto 2659 CON_TPMD4 ditto 2660 CON_TPMD5 ditto 2661 CON_TPMD6 ditto 2662 CON_TPMD7 ditto 2663 CON_TPMD8 ditto 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 PROT_COM_RECV Protection inactivate command received 2687 2688 TPLED_RST_RECV TRIP LED reset command received 2689 2690 OP_CMD_RECV CB open command received 2691 CL_CMD_RECV CB close command received 2692 LOCK_CMD_RECV CB control lock command received 2693 OP_ENABLE CB operation enable

242

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700

2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 TEMP001 2817 TEMP002 2818 TEMP003 2819 TEMP004 2820 TEMP005 2821 TEMP006 2822 TEMP007 2823 TEMP008 2824 TEMP009 2825 TEMP010 2826 TEMP011 2827 TEMP012 2828 TEMP013 2829 TEMP014 2830 TEMP015 2831 TEMP016 2832 TEMP017 2833 TEMP018 2834 TEMP019 2835 TEMP020 2836 TEMP021 2837 TEMP022 2838 TEMP023 2839 TEMP024 2840 TEMP025 2841 TEMP026

243

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 2842 TEMP027 2843 TEMP028 2844 TEMP029 2845 TEMP030 2846 TEMP031 2847 TEMP032 2848 TEMP033 2849 TEMP034 2850 TEMP035 2851 TEMP036 2852 TEMP037 2853 TEMP038 2854 TEMP039 2855 TEMP040 2856 TEMP041 2857 TEMP042 2858 TEMP043 2859 TEMP044 2860 TEMP045 2861 TEMP046 2862 TEMP047 2863 TEMP048 2864 TEMP049 2865 TEMP050 2866 TEMP051 2867 TEMP052 2868 TEMP053 2869 TEMP054 2870 TEMP055 2871 TEMP056 2872 TEMP057 2873 TEMP058 2874 TEMP059 2875 TEMP060 2876 TEMP061 2877 TEMP062 2878 TEMP063 2879 TEMP064 2880 TEMP065 2881 TEMP066 2882 TEMP067 2883 TEMP068 2884 TEMP069 2885 TEMP070 2886 TEMP071 2887 TEMP072 2888 TEMP073 2889 TEMP074 2890 TEMP075 2891 TEMP076 2892 TEMP077

244

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


245

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


246

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


247

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

No. Signal Name Contents 3046 TEMP231 3047 TEMP232 3048 TEMP233 3049 TEMP234 3050 TEMP235 3051 TEMP236 3052 TEMP237 3053 TEMP238 3054 TEMP239 3055 TEMP240 3056 TEMP241 3057 TEMP242 3058 TEMP243 3059 TEMP244 3060 TEMP245 3061 TEMP246 3062 TEMP247 3063 TEMP248 3064 TEMP249 3065 TEMP250 3066 TEMP251 3067 TEMP252 3068 TEMP253 3069 TEMP254 3070 TEMP255 3071 TEMP256

248

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix C

Binary Output Default Setting List

249

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Binary Output Default Setting List

Relay Model

BO No.

Terminal No.

Signal Name

Contents Setting

Signal No.

Logic (OR:0, AND:1)

Reset (Inst:0, Del:1

DW:2 Latch:3) GRE170

-300

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F.

TB6: 1 - 2 3 - 4 11 – 12 13 – 14 9 - 10

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail

Off (Link to CB1 Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB1 Open SW) Alarm output (General) Off

0

371

380 0

0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

GRE170

-301

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F. BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

TB6: 1 - 2 3 - 4 11 – 12 13 – 14 9 - 10 TB1: 1 – 2 3 – 4 5 – 6 7 – 8 9 – 10 11 – 12

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail GENERAL TRIP GENERAL TRIP NON NON NON NON

Off (Link to CB1 Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB1 Open SW) Alarm output (General) Off Relay trip (General) Relay trip (General) Off Off Off Off

0

371

380 0

371 380 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

GRE160

-302

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F. BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16

TB6: 1 - 2 3 - 4 11 – 12 13 – 14 9 – 10 TB1: 1 – 2 3 – 4 5 – 6 7 – 8 9 – 10 11 – 12 TB3; 1 – 2 3 – 4 5 – 6 7 – 8 9 – 10 11 – 12

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON NON NON NON NON NON NON NON GENERAL ALARM GENERAL TRIP

Off (Link to CB1 Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB1 Open SW) Alarm output (General) Off Relay trip (General) Alarm output (General) Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Alarm output (General) Relay trip (General)

0

371

380 0

371 380 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

380 371

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

250

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix D

Details of Relay Menu,

LCD & Keypad Operation

251

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a-1 b-1

MAIN MENU Record Status Set. (view) Set. (change) Control Test

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/4 Fault #1 16/Jul/2014 18:13:57.031 DIF Phase ABC



/1 Record Fault Event Disturbance Counter

/2 Fault View record Clear

/3 Fault #1 16/Jul/2014 18:13:57.031

/3 Disturbance #1 16/Jul/2014 18:13:57.401

/2 Event View record Clear

/3 Event 16/Jul/2014 480 DIF trip On

/2 Disturbance View record Clear

Refer to Section 4.2.3.1.



252

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a-1

Clear Trips? END=Y CANCEL=N

/3 Counter Trips ***** Trips A ***** Trips B ***** Trips C ***** ∑I^y A *****E6 ∑I^y B *****E6 ∑I^y C *****E6

/2 Counter View record Clear Trips Clear Trips A Clear Trips B Clear Trips C Clear ∑I^y A Clear ∑I^y B Clear ∑I^y C

Clear Trips A? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips B? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips C? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear ∑I^y A? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear ∑I^y B? END=Y CANCEL=N

a-1 b-1

Clear ∑I^y C? END=Y CANCEL=N

a-1


a-1 b-1

253

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a-1, b-1

a-1

/3 Metering Ia1 **.** kA

/2 12/Nov/2014 22:56:19 [L]

/2 Binary I/O IP [0000 00 ]

/2 Ry element DIF#1[000000000]

/2 Time sync. *BI: Inact.

/2 LCD contrast

/1 Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast Power para. Motor para.

/1 Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

Refer to Section 4.2.4.

/2 Version Relay type Software

/2 Description Plant name Description Alarm1 Text Alarm2 Text

Refer to Section 4.2.5

■Software GS1E**-07-*

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗

/2 Comms Addr.Param. Switch /3 Switch

RS485BR 1

GRE170-301A-10 -10

/3 Addr./Param. Modbus 2

/2 Metering Metering Demand Direction /3 Demand

Ia1max **.** kA

/3 Direction Ia1 Forward

/2 Motor para. View para. Set para Clear para.

/2 Power para. Set para Clear para.

/3 Set para. WH+ **** kWh

Clear Pow.Para? END=Y CANCEL=N

/3 View para. Time Counter Current

/4 Time Last start_up

/4 Counter Start(H+C) ***

/4 Current Peakst. *.**kA

/3 Set para. Time Counter

/4 Running *:**:**

/4 Counter Start(H+C) ***

Clear Mot.Para? END=Y CANCEL=N

254

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/2 Record Disturbance Counter

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/3 Group1 Parameter Trip

/2 Act. gp. =* Common Group1 Group2

/2 Status Metering Time sync. /3 Time sync.

Time sync 0

/3 Metering Display 1

/4 Time/starter Time1 2.0s

/4 Scheme sw TRIP1 0

/4 Scheme sw TC1SPEN

/4 Alarm set TC1ALM 10000

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

/3 Disturbance Time/starter Scheme sw

/3 Common APPLCT 1

255

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a-1 b-1 C-1 e-1

/6 OC prot. OC1EN 1

/4 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/5 Scheme sw Application DIF prot. OC. prot. EF prot. Motor prot. NOC prot. Misc prot. OV prot. UV prot. ZOV prot. NOV prot. FRQ prot.

/6 EF prot. EF1EN 1

/6 NOC prot. NC1EN 1

/6 Misc prot. LOFEN 1

/6 OV prot. OV1EN 1

/6 UV prot. UV1EN 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗ /5 CT/VT ratio 1CT 400

/4 Parameter Line name CT/VT ratio

/6 Application MOC1 0

/6 DIF prot. DIFEN 1

/6 FRQ prot. FRQ1EN 1

/6 ZOV Trip ZOV1EN 1

/6 Motor prot. EXSTEN 1

/6 NOV Trip NOV1EN 1

256

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a-1 b-1 C-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 e-1

/6 Prot.element DIF prot. OC prot. EF prot. NOC prot. Misc prot. OV prot. UV prot. ZOV prot. NOV prot. FRQ prot.

/6 OC prot. OCθ -4.5deg

/6 EF prot. EFθ -4.5deg

/6 NOC prot. NC1 0.40A

/6 Misc prot. Z0 10.0Ω

/6 DIF prot. ik 1.00pu

/6 OV prot. OV1 120.0V

/6 UV prot. UV1 20.0V

/6 FRQ prot. FRQ1 -1.00Hz

/6 Motor prot. IMOT 1.00A

/6 ZOV prot. ZOV1 20.0V

/6 NOV prot. NOV1 20.0V

257

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/3 LED LED1 OR, I R

/2 Binary O/P BO1 AND, INS ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗ BO2 AND, INS ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗ BO16 OR, L ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗ TBO1 0.20s TBO16 0.20s

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/4 LED1 BIT1 I,O

/4 LED2 BIT1 I,O

a-1 b-1


a-1 b-1 c-1

/2 Binary I/P BI Status BI1 BI2

/3 BI Status BITHR1 0

/3 BI1 Timer Functions

/4 Timers BI1PUD 0.00s /4 Functions BI1SNS 0

/2 Control Control 0 Interlock

/2 Frequency

258

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Set.(change) Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Set.(change) Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

: Confirmation trap

: Password trap

Password [_ ] 1234567890←

Change settings? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

_ ABCDEFG

_ ABCDEFG

/2 Description Plant name Description Alarm1 Text : Alarm4 Text


a-1

a-1 b-2

/2 Comms Addr./Param Switch

/3 Addr./Param

/3 Switch

/1 Set.(change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

/4 Time/starter

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record Disturbance Counter

/3 Disturbance Time/starter Scheme sw


/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

259

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

a 1 b 2 c 2 d 2 e 2

a-1 b-2 /3 Metering

/3 Time sync.

/2 Status Metering Time sync.

/2 Protection Change act. gp. Change set. Copy gp.

/3 Change act. gp.

/3 Act gp.=1 Common Group1 Group2



/4 Common


_ ABCDEFG

/6 CT/VT ratio

/5 Parameter Line name CT/VT ratio

260

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/5 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

/6 Scheme sw Application DIF prot. OC prot. EF prot. Motor prot. NOC prot. Misc prot. OV prot. UV prot. ZOV prot. NUV prot. FRQ prot.

/7 OC prot.

/7 EF prot.

/7 NOC prot.

/7 Misc prot.

/7 OV prot.

/7 UV prot.

/7 Application

/7 DIF prot.

/7 FRQ prot.

/7 Motor prot.

/7 ZOV prot.

/7 NOV prot.

261

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

/3 Copy A to B A _ B _


/4 Logic/Reset

/4 Functions

/3 BO1 Logic/Reset Functions

/2 Binary O/P BO1 BO2 BO15 BO16

/3 BO16 Logic/Reset Functions


/2 Binary I/P BI Status BI1 BI2 BI3 BI17 BI18

/3 BI1 Timers Functions

/3 BI* Timers Functions

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

a-1 b-2 c-3



/5 Logic/Reset

/5 Functions

/4 LED1 Logic/Reset Functions LED Color

/3 LED LED1 LED6 CB CLOSED

/4 LED6 Logic/Reset

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/4 CB CLOSED LED Color

/5 LED Color

/5 LED Color

/3 BI Status

262

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Operate? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/1 Test Password(Test) Switch Binary O/P

/2 Switch A.M.F 1

/2 Binary O/P

Refer to Section 4.2.7.

a-1 b-2 c-3

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/5 Reset

/5 Functions

/4 IND1 Reset Functions

/4 IND2 Reset Functions

: Password trap

Password [_ ] 1234567890←

/2 Control Control 1 Disable/Enable Interlock1 0 Disable/Enable

/2 Frequency Frequency 0 50Hz/60Hz

Test Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Test Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

/1 Control Password(Ctrl) Local/Remote CB close/open

Control Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Control Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

263

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix E

Case Outline

264

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Front View

17 127 36

Side View

292

160

4 holes-φ4　ｆor Panel mount Jig

　ｆor Optional Communication Port

1 23 45 67 89 1011 　 1213　　1415　　16

TB6 TB5

Terminal block

TB3

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213　 14

TB2

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24

for Communication Port

TB1

1 23 45 67 89 1011 　 1213　　1415　　16

TB4

Rear View

Panel cut-out

177

298

Case Outline for 300A series

265

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix F

Typical Application Diagram

266

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Ia

Ib

Ic

Ie

CB1 CLOSE SW

Relay fail

CB1 OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

R.F.

TB6

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

Control Power

BI1

BI2

BI3-6

RS485

GRE170-300A

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V


Threshold77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

CB CLOSED

CB OPEN

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

**

**

**

**

DEFAULT BI1-6; Off

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

Va

Vb

Ve

TB2

1234567891011121314

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

N.C.

IRIG-B

OptionalRS485

***

Optional Communication Port ***

100BASE-TX　1port / 2port

A+B-

COM

100BASE-FX　1port / 2port

N.C.

Vc

Ia

Ib

Ic

**

**

**

N.C.

N.C.

TB4

12345678910111213141516

TB5

12345678910

BO31112

BO413141516

N.C.

N.C.

Motor

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.

(TB4; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, TB5; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6)

Model GRE170-300A Typical Application Diagram

267

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Ia

Ib

Ic

Ie

CB1 CLOSE SW

Relay fail

CB1 OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

R.F.

TB6

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

Control Power

BI1

BI2

BI3-6

RS485

GRE170-301A

N.C.



Threshold77/154V

A+B-

COM


CB CLOSED

CB OPEN

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

**

**

**

**

DEFAULT BI1-6; Off

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

Va

Vb

Ve

TB2

1234567891011121314

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

N.C.

IRIG-B

OptionalRS485

***



A+B-

COM


N.C.

Vc

Ia

Ib

Ic

**

**

**

N.C.

N.C.

TB4

12345678910111213141516

TB5

12345678910

BO31112

BO413141516

N.C.

N.C.

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BI11

BI12

Threshold77/154V

BI7

BI8

BI9

BI10

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

TB1

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFFBO5 GENERAL TRIPBO6 GENERAL ALARMBO7 OFFBO8 OFFBO9 OFFBO10 OFF


Motor


(TB4; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, TB5; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6)


268

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Ia

Ib

Ic

Ie

CB1 CLOSE SW

Relay fail

CB1 OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

R.F.

TB6

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

Control Power

BI1

BI2

BI3-6

RS485

GRE170-302A

N.C.



Threshold77/154V

A+B-

COM


CB CLOSED

CB OPEN

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

**

**

**

**

DEFAULT BI1-6; Off

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

Va

Vb

Ve

TB2

1234567891011121314

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

N.C.

IRIG-B

OptionalRS485

***



A+B-

COM


N.C.

Vc

Ia

Ib

Ic

**

**

**

N.C.

N.C.

TB4

12345678910111213141516

TB5

12345678910

BO31112

BO413141516

N.C.

N.C.

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

BO11

TB3

BO12

BO13

BO14

BO15

BO16

BI17

BI18

Threshold77/154V

BI13

BI14

BI15

BI16

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

BO9

BO10

BI11

BI12

Threshold77/154V

BI7

BI8

BI9

BI10

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

TB1

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFFBO5 GENERAL TRIPBO6 GENERAL ALARMBO7 OFFBO8 OFFBO9 OFFBO10 OFFBO11 OFFBO12 OFFBO13 OFFBO14 OFFBO15 GENERAL ALARMBO16 GENERAL TRIP


Motor


(TB4; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, TB5; 1-2, 3-4, 5-6)


269

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix G

Relay Setting Sheet 1. Relay Identification

2. Contact Settings

3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

270

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Relay Setting Sheets 1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number Frequency CT rating VT rating dc supply voltage Password Active setting group

2. Contact Settings

(1) BO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 (2) BI BI1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4 BI 5 BI 6 BI 7 BI 8 BI 9 BI 10 BI 11 BI 12 BI 13 BI 14 BI 15 BI 16 BI 17 BI 18

271

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

No Name Range Unit Contents Default Value

Model 300A Model 301A Model 302A

1 Active gp. 1 - 2 － Active setting group 1 1 1

2 APPLCT Off - On － Application setting of CT On(1) On(1) On(1)

3 APPLVT Off - On － Application setting of VT 3PN(1) 3PN(1) 3PN(1)

4 CT1 1A - 5A － CT1 Rating 1A(0) 1A(0) 1A(0)

5 CT1POL Object - Outside － CT1 Polarity Object(0) Object(0) Object(0)

6 CTn1 1A - 5A － CTn1 Rating 1A(0) 1A(0) 1A(0)

7 MOTEN Off - On － Moter Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

8 CT1SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － CT1 AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable ALM(2) ALM(2) ALM(2)

9 CT2SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － CT2 AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable ALM(2) ALM(2) ALM(2)

10 V0SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － V0 Super Visor Enable ALM(2) ALM(2) ALM(2)

11 V2SVEN Off - ALM&BLK - ALM － V2 Super Visor Enable ALM(2) ALM(2) ALM(2)

12 AOLED Off - On － TRIP LED lighting control at alarm output On(1) On(1) On(1)

13 Line name Specified by user － Line name no-name no-name no-name

14 1CT 1 - 20000 － CT1 ratio 400 400 400

15 2CT 1 - 20000 － CT2 ratio 400 400 400

16 1nCT 1 - 20000 － CT1n ratio 200 200 200

17 2nCT 1 - 20000 － CT2n ratio 200 200 200

18 PVT 1 - 20000 － Phase VT ratio 100 100 100

19 VEVT 1 - 20000 － Ve VT ratio 100 100 100

20 MOC1 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － OC1 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

21 MOC2 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － OC2 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

22 MEF1 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － EF1 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

23 MEF2 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － EF2 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

24 MSE1 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － SEF1 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

25 MSE2 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － SEF2 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

26 MOCV1 IEC - IEEE - US - C － OCV1 Delay Type IEC(0) IEC(0) IEC(0)

27 MOCV2 IEC - IEEE - US - C － OCV2 Delay Type IEC(0) IEC(0) IEC(0)

28 MNC1 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － NOC1 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

29 MNC2 D - IEC - IEEE - US - C － NOC2 Delay Type D(0) D(0) D(0)

30 DIFEN Off - On － DIF Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

31 HOCEN Off - On － HOC Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

32 DIFTEN Off - On － DIF1 Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

33 DIFTPMD 3POR - 1P － DIF trip mode 3POR(0) 3POR(0) 3POR(0)

34 2f-lock Off - On － 2f restraint On(1) On(1) On(1)

35 5f-lock Off - On － 5f restraint On(1) On(1) On(1)

36 CTSEN Off - On － CTS Enable(HS) Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

37 OC1EN Off - On － OC1Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

38 OC1-DIR FWD - REV - NON － OC1 Direction FWD(0) FWD(0) FWD(0)

39 MOC1C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

40 MOC1C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

41 MOC1C-US CO2 - CO8 － OC1 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

42 OC1R DEF - DEP － OC1 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

43 OC1-2F NA - Block － OC1 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

44 OC2EN Off - On － OC2Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)


46 MOC2C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

47 MOC2C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

48 MOC2C-US CO2 - CO8 － OC2 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

49 OC2R DEF - DEP － OC2 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)


51 OC3EN Off - On － OC3 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

272

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4





54 OC4EN Off - On － OC4 Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)



57 OCTP 3POR - 2OUTOF3 － OC trip mode 3POR(0) 3POR(0) 3POR(0)

58 EF1EN Off - On － EF1 Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

59 EF1-DIR FWD - REV - NON － EF1 Direction FWD(0) FWD(0) FWD(0)

60 MEF1C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － EFI1 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

61 MEF1C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － EFI1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

62 MEF1C-US CO2 - CO8 － EFI1 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

63 EF1R DEF - DEP － EFI1 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

64 EF1-2F NA - Block － EF1 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

65 EF2EN Off - On － EF2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)


67 MEF2C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － EFI2 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

68 MEF2C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － EFI2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

69 MEF2C-US CO2 - CO8 － EFI2 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

70 EF2R DEF - DEP － EFI2 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)


72 EF3EN Off - On － EF3 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)



75 EF4EN Off - On － EF4 Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)



78 SE1EN Off - On － SEF1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

79 SE1-DIR FWD - REV - NON － SEF1 Direction FWD(0) FWD(0) FWD(0)

80 MSE1C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

81 MSE1C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

82 MSE1C-US CO2 - CO8 － SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

83 SE1R DEF - DEP － SEF1 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

84 SE1S2 Off - On － SEF1-2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

85 SE1-2F NA - Block － SEF1 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)



88 MSE2C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

89 MSE2C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

90 MSE2C-US CO2 - CO8 － SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

91 SE2R DEF - DEP － SEF2 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)








99 ZPEN Off - On － SEF4 2f Block Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

100 EXSTEN Off - On － Start Protection Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

101 STRTEN Off - On － 50S Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

102 LKRTEN Off - On － Locked Rotor Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

103 RSIHEN Off - On － Restart Inhibit Protection Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

273

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



104 STPHEN Off - On － Starts per hour Enable On(1) On(1) On(1)

105 NC1EN Off - On － 1NC1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

106 MNC1C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － 1NC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

107 MNC1C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － 1NC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

108 MNC1C-US CO2 - CO8 － 1NC1 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

109 NC1R DEF - DEP － 1NC1 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

110 NC1-2F NA - Block － 1NC1 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

111 NC2EN Off - On － 1NC2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

112 MNC2C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － 1NC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

113 MNC2C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － 1NC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

114 MNC2C-US CO2 - CO8 － 1NC2 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

115 NC2R DEF - DEP － 1NC2 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

116 NC2-2F NA - Block － 1NC2 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

117 LOFEN Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

118 OCV1EN Off - Cont - Rest － OCV1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

119 MOCV1C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － OCV1 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

120 MOCV1C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － OCV1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

121 MOCV1C-US CO2 - CO8 － OCV1 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

122 MOCV1R DEF - DEP － OCV1 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

123 OCV1-2F NA - Block － OCV1 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

124 OCVTP 3POR - 2OUTOF3 － OCV1 trip mode 3POR(0) 3POR(0) 3POR(0)

125 OCV2EN Off - Cont - Rest － OCV2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

126 MOCV2C-IEC NI - VI - EI - LTI － OCV2 IEC Inverse Curve Type NI(0) NI(0) NI(0)

127 MOCV2C-IEEE MI - VI - EI － OCV2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type MI(0) MI(0) MI(0)

128 MOCV2C-US CO2 - CO8 － OCV2 US Inverse Curve Type CO2(0) CO2(0) CO2(0)

129 MOCV2R DEF - DEP － OCV2 Reset Characteristic DEF(0) DEF(0) DEF(0)

130 OCV2-2F NA - Block － OCV2 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

131 UC1EN Off - On － UC1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

132 UC2EN Off - On － UC2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

133 THMEN Off - On － Thermal OL Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

134 THMAEN Off - On － Thermal Alarm Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

135 THM-Ieq Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

136 BTC Off - On － Back-trip control Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

137 RTC Off - DIR - OC － Re-trip control Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

138 RPCB Use - Nouse － CB condition use Use(0) Use(0) Use(0)

139 RP-UVBLK NA - Block － UV Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

140 RP-Power Disable - Enable － Power Direction Enable Disable(0) Disable(0) Disable(0)

141 Power Send - Receive － Power Direction Send(0) Send(0) Send(0)

142 RP1EN Off - On － Reverse Power1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

143 RP1-2F NA - Block － 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

144 RP2EN Off - On － Reverse Power2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

145 RP2-2F NA - Block － 2f Block Enable NA(0) NA(0) NA(0)

146 RTD1EN Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

147 RTD1AEN Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)







154 MJAEN Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

155 MJEN Off - On － Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

274

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



156 OV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

157 OV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － OV2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

158 OV3EN Off - On － OV3 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

159 OV4EN Off - On － OV4 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

160 UV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV1 Enable DT(1) DT(1) DT(1)

161 UV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － UV2 Enable DT(1) DT(1) DT(1)

162 UV3EN Off - On － UV3 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

163 UV4EN Off - On － UV4 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

164 VBLKEN Off - On － UV Block Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

165 ZOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV1 Enable DT(1) DT(1) DT(1)

166 ZOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － ZOV2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

167 NOV1EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

168 NOV2EN Off - DT - IDMT - C － NOV2 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

169 FRQ1EN Off - OF - UF － FRQ1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)




173 DFRQ1EN Off - R - D － DFRQ1 Enable Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)




177 ik 0.10 - 1.00 PU Minimum operating current 0.30 0.30 0.30

178 p1 10 - 100 % % slope of small current region 100 100 100

179 p2 10 - 200 % % slope of large current region 200 200 200

180 kp 1.00 - 20.00 PU Break point of DIF characteristic 1.00 1.00 1.00

181 kh 2.00 - 20.00 PU hige-set current 3.00 3.00 3.00

182 k2f 10 - 50 % 2f restraint 15 15 15

183 k5f 10 - 50 % 5f restraint 30 30 30

184 TDIF 0.00 - 10.00 s DIF Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

185 TDIFHS 0.00 - 10.00 s DIFHS Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

186 OCTH -95 - 95 deg OC Characteristic Angle -45 -45 -45

187 OC1 0.10 - 25.00 A OC1 Threshold setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

188 TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

189 TOC1M 0.010 - 15.000 － OC1 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

190 TOC1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OC1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

191 TOC1RM 0.010 - 15.000 － OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

192 OC1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1 0.14 0.14 0.14

193 OC1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

194 OC1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

195 OC1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

196 OC1-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00



199 TOC2M 0.010 - 15.000 － OC2 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

200 TOC2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OC2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

201 TOC2RM 0.010 - 15.000 － OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

202 OC2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2 0.14 0.14 0.14

203 OC2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

204 OC2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

205 OC2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

206 OC2-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00


275

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4






211 EFTH -95 - 95 deg EF Characteristic Angle -45 -45 -45

212 EFV 0.5 - 100.0 V EF ZPS voltage level 3.0 3.0 3.0

213 EF1 0.05 - 25.00 A EF1 Threshold setting 0.30 0.30 0.30

214 TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 EFinite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

215 TEF1M 0.010 - 15.000 － EF1 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

216 TEF1R 0.0 - 300.0 s EF1 EFinite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

217 TEF1RM 0.010 - 15.000 － EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

218 EF1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1 0.14 0.14 0.14

219 EF1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

220 EF1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

221 EF1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

222 EF1-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00



225 TEF2M 0.010 - 15.000 － EF2 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

226 TEF2R 0.0 - 300.0 s EF2 EFinite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

227 TEF2RM 0.010 - 15.000 － EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

228 EF2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2 0.14 0.14 0.14

229 EF2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

230 EF2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

231 EF2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

232 EF2-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00





237 SETH -95 - 95 deg SEF Characteristic Angle (0) (0) (0)

238 SEV 0.5 - 100.0 V SEF ZPS voltage level (3.0) (3.0) (3.0)

239 SE1 0.025 - 2.500 A SEF1 Threshold setting (0.025) (0.025) (0.025)

240 TSE1 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF1 Definite time setting (0.00) (0.00) (0.00)

241 TSE1M 0.010 - 15.000 － SEF1 Time multiplier setting (1.000) (1.000) (1.000)

242 TSE1R 0.0 - 300.0 s SEF1 Definite time reset delay (0.0) (0.0) (0.0)

243 TSE1RM 0.010 - 15.000 － SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier (1.000) (1.000) (1.000)

244 TS1S2 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF1 Stage 2 definite timer settings (0.00) (0.00) (0.00)

245 SE1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1 (0.14) (0.14) (0.14)

246 SE1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto (0.02) (0.02) (0.02)

247 SE1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto (0.000) (0.000) (0.000)

248 SE1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto (2.00) (2.00) (2.00)

249 SE1-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto (2.00) (2.00) (2.00)



252 TSE2M 0.010 - 15.000 － SEF2 Time multiplier setting (1.000) (1.000) (1.000)

253 TSE2R 0.0 - 300.0 s SEF2 Definite time reset delay (0.0) (0.0) (0.0)

254 TSE2RM 0.010 - 15.000 － SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier (1.000) (1.000) (1.000)

255 SE2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2 (0.14) (0.14) (0.14)

256 SE2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto (0.02) (0.02) (0.02)

257 SE2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto (0.000) (0.000) (0.000)

258 SE2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto (2.00) (2.00) (2.00)

259 SE2-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto (2.00) (2.00) (2.00)

276

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4







264 ZP 0.00 - 100.00 W Residual Power Threshold (0.00) (0.00) (0.00)

265 NC1 0.10 - 10.00 A NOC1 Threshold setting 0.40 0.40 0.40

266 TNC1 0.00 - 300.00 s NOC1 Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

267 TNC1M 0.010 - 15.000 － NOC1 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

268 TNC1R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOC1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

269 TNC1RM 0.010 - 15.000 － NOC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

270 NC1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC1 0.14 0.14 0.14

271 NC1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

272 NC1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

273 NC1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

274 NC1-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

275 NC2 0.10 - 10.00 A NOC2 Threshold setting 0.20 0.20 0.20

276 TNC2 0.00 - 300.00 s NOC2 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

277 TNC2M 0.010 - 15.000 － NOC2 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

278 TNC2R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOC2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

279 TNC2RM 0.010 - 15.000 － NOC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

280 NC2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC2 0.14 0.14 0.14

281 NC2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

282 NC2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

283 NC2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

284 NC2-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

285 IMOT 0.20 - 10.00 A Motor rated current 1.00 1.00 1.00

286 TEXST 0.1 - 300.0 s Motor Start Pro. Time. 60.0 60.0 60.0

287 TMTST 0.1 - 300.0 s Motor Start_up Time. 60.0 60.0 60.0

288 STRT 0.10 - 50.00 A 50S Threshold setting 5.00 5.00 5.00

289 TSTRT 0.00 - 300.00 s 50S Definite time setting. 0.00 0.00 0.00

290 LKRTIS 0.10 - 100.00 A Motor Start Current. 7.50 7.50 7.50

291 TLKRT 1 - 300 s Rotor Restraint Time. 120 120 120

292 RTTHM 50 - 500 % Rotor Permissible Heat Range. 200 200 200

293 LIMNUM 1 - 60 － limit number for Starts per hour 5 5 5

294 Z0 1.0 - 20.0 OHM 10.0 10.0 10.0

295 ZG 4.0 - 200.0 OHM 50.0 50.0 50.0

296 TLOF 0.00 - 100.00 s 0.30 0.30 0.30

297 OCV1 10.0 - 120.0 V OCV1 Threshold setting 70.0 70.0 70.0

298 OCV1IS 0.10 - 5.00 A OCV1 Threshold setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

299 TOCV1M 0.010 - 15.000 － OCV1 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

300 TOCV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OCV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

301 TOCV1RM 0.010 - 15.000 － OCV1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

302 OCV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OCV1 0.14 0.14 0.14

303 OCV1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

304 OCV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

305 OCV1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

306 OCV1-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

307 OCV2 10.0 - 120.0 V OCV2 Threshold setting 70.0 70.0 70.0

308 OCV2IS 0.10 - 5.00 A OCV2 Threshold setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

309 TOCV2M 0.010 - 15.000 － OCV2 Time multiplier setting 1.000 1.000 1.000

310 TOCV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OCV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

311 TOCV2RM 0.010 - 15.000 － OCV2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 1.000 1.000 1.000

277

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



312 OCV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OCV2 0.14 0.14 0.14

313 OCV2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 0.02 0.02 0.02

314 OCV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

315 OCV2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

316 OCV2-b 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 2.00 2.00 2.00

317 UC1 0.10 - 10.00 A UC1 Threshold setting 0.40 0.40 0.40

318 TUC1 0.00 - 300.00 s UC1 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

319 UC2 0.10 - 10.00 A UC2 Threshold setting 0.20 0.20 0.20

320 TUC2 0.00 - 300.00 s UC2 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

321 THM 0.40 - 10.00 A Thermal overload setting 1.0 1.0 1.0

322 THMIP 0.00 - 5.00 A Pre Current value 0.00 0.00 0.00

323 THMQ 0 - 10 － 3 3 3

324 TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 m Thermal Time Constant 10.0 10.0 10.0

325 TTHM2 0.5 - 500.0 m Thermal Time2 Constant 10.0 10.0 10.0

326 THMA 50 - 100 % Thermal alarm setting 80 80 80

327 ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity of 2f 15 15 15

328 ICDOC 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold of fundamental current 1.00 1.00 1.00

329 CBF 0.10 - 10.00 A CBF Threshold setting 0.50 0.50 0.50

330 TBTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Back trip Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

331 TRTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Re-trip Definite time setting 0.50 0.50 0.50

332 RP1 -1500.0 - -5.0 W Reverse Power Threshold setting -30.0 -30.0 -30.0

333 RP1DPR 50 - 98 % Reverse Power DO/PU ratio 95 95 95

334 TRP1 0.00 - 300.00 s Reverse Power Definite time setting 0.20 0.20 0.20

335 TCBRP1 0.0 - 60.0 s wait time after CB closeing 5.0 5.0 5.0

336 RP2 -1500.0 - -5.0 W Reverse Power Threshold setting -30.0 -30.0 -30.0

337 RP2DPR 50 - 98 % Reverse Power DO/PU ratio 95 95 95

338 TRP2 0.00 - 300.00 s Reverse Power Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

339 TCBRP2 0.0 - 60.0 s wait time after CB closeing 5.0 5.0 5.0

340 RPVBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V UV Blocking threshold 40.0 40.0 40.0

341 RTD1 -50 - 250 ℃ 130 130 130

342 TRTD1 0.0 - 100.0 s 3.0 3.0 3.0

343 RTD1A -50 - 250 ℃ 110 110 110

344 TRTD1A 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0

345 RTD2 -50 - 250 ℃ 130 130 130

346 TRTD2 0.0 - 100.0 s 3.0 3.0 3.0

347 RTD2A -50 - 250 ℃ 110 110 110

348 TRTD2A 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0

349 RTD3 -50 - 250 ℃ 130 130 130

350 TRTD3 0.0 - 100.0 s 3.0 3.0 3.0

351 RTD3A -50 - 250 ℃ 110 110 110

352 TRTD3A 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0

353 RTD4 -50 - 250 ℃ 130 130 130

354 TRTD4 0.0 - 100.0 s 3.0 3.0 3.0

355 RTD4A -50 - 250 ℃ 110 110 110

356 TRTD4A 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.0 0.0 0.0

357 MJA 0.1 - 25.0 A 0.9 0.9 0.9

358 MJ 0.1 - 25.0 A 1.2 1.2 1.2

359 TMJA 0.00 - 100.00 s 5.00 5.00 5.00

360 TMJ 0.00 - 100.00 s 0.50 0.50 0.50

361 TBLMJ 0.0 - 60.0 s 15.0 15.0 15.0

362 OV1 10.0 - 200.0 V OV1 Threshold setting 120.0 120.0 120.0

363 TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s OV1 Definite time setting 0.10 0.10 0.10

278

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



364 TOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV1 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

365 TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

366 OV1DPR 10 - 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95 95 95

367 OV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 1.00 1.00 1.00

368 OV1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00 1.00

369 OV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000



372 TOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － OV2 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

373 TOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0


375 OV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 1.00 1.00 1.00

376 OV2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － OV2 Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

377 OV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － OV2 Time multiplier setting 0.000 0.000 0.000







384 UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 Threshold setting 20.0 20.0 20.0

385 TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s UV1 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

386 TUV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV1 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

387 TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

388 UV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 1.00 1.00 1.00

389 UV1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00 1.00

390 UV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000



393 TUV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － UV2 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

394 TUV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

395 UV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 1.00 1.00 1.00

396 UV2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00 1.00

397 UV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000





402 VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UV Blocking threshold 10.0 10.0 10.0

403 ZOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV1 Threshold setting 20.0 20.0 20.0

404 TZOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV1 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

405 TZOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV1 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

406 TZOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

407 ZOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1 1.00 1.00 1.00

408 ZOV1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00 1.00

409 ZOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

410 ZOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V ZOV2 Threshold setting 40.0 40.0 40.0

411 TZOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s ZOV2 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

412 TZOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

413 TZOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s ZOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

414 ZOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2 1.00 1.00 1.00

415 ZOV2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ZOV2 Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

279

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



416 ZOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 0.000 0.000 0.000

417 NOV1 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV1 Threshold setting 20.0 20.0 20.0

418 TNOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV1 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

419 TNOV1M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV1 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

420 TNOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV1 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

421 NOV1-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1 1.00 1.00 1.00

422 NOV1-a 0.01 - 5.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00 1.00

423 NOV1-C 0.000 - 5.000 － ditto 0.000 0.000 0.000

424 NOV2 1.0 - 160.0 V NOV2 Threshold setting 40.0 40.0 40.0

425 TNOV2 0.00 - 300.00 s NOV2 Definite time setting 0.00 0.00 0.00

426 TNOV2M 0.05 - 100.00 － NOV2 Time multiplier setting 10.00 10.00 10.00

427 TNOV2R 0.0 - 300.0 s NOV2 Definite time reset delay 0.0 0.0 0.0

428 NOV2-k 0.00 - 300.00 － Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2 1.00 1.00 1.00

429 NOV2-a 0.01 - 5.00 － NOV2 Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00

430 NOV2-C 0.000 - 5.000 － NOV2 Time multiplier setting 0.000 0.000 0.000

431 FRQ1 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ1 Threshold setting -1.00 -1.00 -1.00

432 TFRQ1 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ1 Definite time setting 1.00 1.00 1.00







439 FVBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V UV Blocking threshold 40.0 40.0 40.0

440 DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 Hzs DFRQ1 Threshold setting. 15.0 15.0 15.0




444 A.M.F. Off - On － Automatic monitoring function On On On

445 UVTST Off - On － Disable / Enable VBLK in UV trip scheme. Off Off Off

446 RESET Off - On － Forcibly Reset of Thermal-θ value. Off Off Off

447 IECTST Off - On － IEC103 Test Mode Off Off Off

448 Modbus 1 - 247 － Relay ID No. for Modbus 1 1 1

449 Modbus2 1 - 247 － Relay ID No. for Modbus2 2 2 2

450 IEC 0 - 254 － Station address for IEC103 1 1 1

451 IEC2 0 - 254 － Station address for IEC103 2 Not Use(2) Not Use(2) Not Use(2)

452 RS485BR 9.6 - 19.2 － Baud rate for RS485 Port1 19.2(1) 19.2(1) 19.2(1)

453 IECBLK Normal - Blocked － Monitor direction blocked Normal(0) Normal(0) Normal(0)

454 RS485P Off - Modbus - IEC103 － Protocol on RS485 Port1 Modbus(1) Modbus(1) Modbus(1)

455 EtherP Off - IEC 61850 － Protocol on Ethernet1 Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

456 BITRN 0 - 128 － Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events 100 100 100

457 EV1 0 - 3071 － Event record signal No 768 768 768

458 EV2 0 - 3071 － ditto 769 769 769

459 EV3 0 - 3071 － ditto 770 770 770

460 EV4 0 - 3071 － ditto 771 771 771

461 EV5 0 - 3071 － ditto 772 772 772

462 EV6 0 - 3071 － ditto 773 773 773

463 EV7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 774 774

464 EV8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 775 775

465 EV9 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 776 776

466 EV10 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 777 777

467 EV11 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 778 778

280

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



468 EV12 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 779 779

469 EV13 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 780

470 EV14 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 781

471 EV15 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 782

472 EV16 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 783

473 EV17 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 784

474 EV18 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 785

475 EV19 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

476 EV20 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

477 EV21 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

478 EV22 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

479 EV23 0 - 3071 － ditto 371 371 371

480 EV24 0 - 3071 － ditto 1639 1639 1639

481 EV25 0 - 3071 － ditto 380 380 380

482 EV26 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

483 EV27 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

484 EV28 0 - 3071 － ditto 1251 1251 1251

485 EV29 0 - 3071 － ditto 1266 1266 1266

486 EV30 0 - 3071 － ditto 1267 1267 1267

487 EV31 0 - 3071 － ditto 1268 1268 1268

488 EV32 0 - 3071 － ditto 1269 1269 1269

489 EV33 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

490 EV34 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

491 EV35 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

492 EV36 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

493 EV37 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

494 EV38 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

495 EV39 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

496 EV40 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

497 EV41 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

498 EV42 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

499 EV43 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

500 EV44 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

501 EV45 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

502 EV46 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

503 EV47 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

504 EV48 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

505 EV49 0 - 3071 － ditto 1258 1258 1258

506 EV50 0 - 3071 － ditto 1438 1438 1438

507 EV51 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

508 EV52 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

509 EV53 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

510 EV54 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

511 EV55 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

512 EV56 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

513 EV57 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

514 EV58 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

515 EV59 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

516 EV60 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

517 EV61 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

518 EV62 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

519 EV63 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

281

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



520 EV64 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

521 EV65 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

522 EV66 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

523 EV67 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

524 EV68 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

525 EV69 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

526 EV70 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

527 EV71 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

528 EV72 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

529 EV73 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

530 EV74 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

531 EV75 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

532 EV76 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

533 EV77 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

534 EV78 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

535 EV79 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

536 EV80 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

537 EV81 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

538 EV82 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

539 EV83 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

540 EV84 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

541 EV85 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

542 EV86 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

543 EV87 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

544 EV88 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

545 EV89 0 - 3071 － ditto 471 471 471

546 EV90 0 - 3071 － ditto 472 472 472

547 EV91 0 - 3071 － ditto 473 473 473

548 EV92 0 - 3071 － ditto 474 474 474

549 EV93 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 475 475

550 EV94 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 476 476

551 EV95 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 477 477

552 EV96 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 478 478

553 EV97 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 479 479

554 EV98 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 480 480

555 EV99 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 481

556 EV100 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 482

557 EV101 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 483

558 EV102 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 484

559 EV103 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 485

560 EV104 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 486

561 EV105 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

562 EV106 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

563 EV107 0 - 3071 － ditto 2640 2640 2640

564 EV108 0 - 3071 － ditto 2641 2641 2641

565 EV109 0 - 3071 － ditto 1448 1448 1448

566 EV110 0 - 3071 － ditto 1449 1449 1449

567 EV111 0 - 3071 － ditto 1450 1450 1450

568 EV112 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

569 EV113 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

570 EV114 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

571 EV115 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

282

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



572 EV116 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

573 EV117 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

574 EV118 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

575 EV119 0 - 3071 － ditto 1445 1445 1445

576 EV120 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

577 EV121 0 - 3071 － ditto 1409 1409 1409

578 EV122 0 - 3071 － ditto 1435 1435 1435

579 EV123 0 - 3071 － ditto 1436 1436 1436

580 EV124 0 - 3071 － ditto 1437 1437 1437

581 EV125 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

582 EV126 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

583 EV127 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

584 EV128 0 - 3071 － ditto 1442 1442 1442

585 Time1 0.1 - 4.9 s Disturbance record previous time 0.3 0.3 0.3

586 Time2 0.1 - 4.9 s Disturbance record after time 2.0 2.0 2.0

587 OC 0.10 - 150.00 A Realy element for disturbance record

initiation 2.00 2.00 2.00

588 EF 0.05 - 100.00 A ditto 0.60 0.60 0.60

589 SEF 0.001 - 1.000 A ditto (0.200) (0.200) (0.200)

590 NOC 0.10 - 10.00 A ditto 0.40 0.40 0.40

591 OV 10.0 - 200.0 V ditto 120.0 120.0 120.0

592 UV 5.0 - 130.0 V ditto 60.0 60.0 60.0

593 ZOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0 20.0 20.0

594 NOV 1.0 - 160.0 V ditto 20.0 20.0 20.0

595 TRIP Off - On － Disturbance record trigger use or not On On On

596 OC Off - On － ditto On On On

597 EF Off - On － ditto On On On

598 SEF Off - On － ditto (Off) (Off) (Off)

599 NOC Off - On － ditto On On On

600 2F Off - On － ditto On On On

601 5F Off - On － ditto On On On

602 OV Off - On － ditto On On On

603 UV Off - On － ditto On On On

604 ZOV Off - On － ditto On On On

605 NOV Off - On － ditto On On On

606 SIG1 0 - 3071 － Signal No 371 371 371

607 SIG2 0 - 3071 － ditto 500 500 500

608 SIG3 0 - 3071 － ditto 501 501 501

609 SIG4 0 - 3071 － ditto 405 405 405

610 SIG5 0 - 3071 － ditto 406 406 406

611 SIG6 0 - 3071 － ditto 407 407 407

612 SIG7 0 - 3071 － ditto 408 408 408

613 SIG8 0 - 3071 － ditto 409 409 409

614 SIG9 0 - 3071 － ditto 410 410 410

615 SIG10 0 - 3071 － ditto 411 411 411

616 SIG11 0 - 3071 － ditto 412 412 412

617 SIG12 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

618 SIG13 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

619 SIG14 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

620 SIG15 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

621 SIG16 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

622 SIG17 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

623 SIG18 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

283

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



624 SIG19 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

625 SIG20 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

626 SIG21 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

627 SIG22 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

628 SIG23 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

629 SIG24 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

630 SIG25 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

631 SIG26 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

632 SIG27 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

633 SIG28 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

634 SIG29 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

635 SIG30 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

636 SIG31 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

637 SIG32 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

638 TCSPEN Off - On - Opt-On － Off Off Off

639 CBSMEN Off - On － Off Off Off

640 TCAEN Off - On － Off Off Off

641 ΣIyAEN Off - On － Off Off Off

642 OPTAEN Off - On － Off Off Off

643 TCALM 1 - 10000 － 10000 10000 10000

644 ΣIyALM 10 - 10000 E6 10000 10000 10000

645 YVALUE 1.0 - 2.0 － 2.0 2.0 2.0

646 OPTALM 100 - 5000 ms 1000 1000 1000

647 Display Pri - Sec - Pri-A － Metering Pri(0) Pri(0) Pri(0)

648 Power Send - Receive － Metering Send(0) Send(0) Send(0)

649 Current Lag - Lead － Metering Lead(1) Lead(1) Lead(1)

650 Time sync. Off - BI - Mod - IRIG -

IEC103 －

Time sync Off(0) Off(0) Off(0)

651 GMT -12 - 12 － GMT 0 0 0

652 GMTm -59 - 59 － GMT min 0 0 0

653 BITHR1 V1 - V2 - V3 － Binary Input Threshold setting1 V2(1) V2(1) V2(1)

654 BITHR2 V1 - V2 － Binary Input Threshold setting2 V1(0) V1(0) V1(0)

655 BI1PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00 0.00 0.00

656 BI1DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Sense 0.00 0.00 0.00

657 BI1SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Pick-up delay Norm(0) Norm(0) Norm(0)
















673 BI7PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay (0.00) 0.00 0.00

674 BI7DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Sense (0.00) 0.00 0.00

675 BI7SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Pick-up delay (Norm(0)) Norm(0) Norm(0)

284

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


















691 BI13PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay (0.00) (0.00) 0.00

692 BI13DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Sense (0.00) (0.00) 0.00

693 BI13SNS Norm - Inv － Binary Input Pick-up delay (Norm(0)) (Norm(0)) Norm(0)
















709 Logic OR - AND － Logic gate BO1 OR(0) OR(0) OR(0)

710 Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application Dl(1) Dl(1) Dl(1)

711 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0 0

712 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

713 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

714 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

715 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

716 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

717 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.2 0.2 0.2



720 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 371

(GEN.TRIP)

371

(GEN.TRIP)

371

(GEN.TRIP)

721 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

722 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

723 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

724 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

725 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

726 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.2 0.2 0.2


285

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4




729 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 380

(GEN.ALARM)

380

(GEN.ALARM)

380

(GEN.ALARM)

730 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

731 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

732 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

733 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

734 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

735 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.2 0.2 0.2



738 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal 0 0 0

739 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

740 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

741 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

742 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

743 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

744 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer 0.2 0.2 0.2

745 Logic OR - AND － Logic gate BO5 (OR(0)) OR(0) OR(0)

746 Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application (Dl(1)) Dl(1) Dl(1)

747 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 371

(GEN.TRIP)

371

(GEN.TRIP)

748 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

749 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

750 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

751 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

752 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

753 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2



756 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 380

(GEN.ALARM)

380

(GEN.ALARM)

757 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

758 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

759 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

760 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

761 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

762 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2



765 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 0 0

766 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

767 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

768 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

769 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

770 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

771 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2



774 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 0 0

775 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

776 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

777 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

778 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

286

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



779 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

780 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2



783 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 0 0

784 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

785 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

786 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

787 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

788 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

789 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2



792 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) 0 0

793 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

794 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

795 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

796 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

797 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) 0 0

798 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) 0.2 0.2

799 Logic OR - AND － Logic gate BO11 (OR(0)) (OR(0)) OR(0)

800 Reset Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat － Reset application (Dl(1)) (Dl(1)) Dl(1)

801 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 0

802 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

803 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

804 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

805 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

806 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

807 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2



810 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 0

811 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

812 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

813 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

814 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

815 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

816 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2



819 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 0

820 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

821 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

822 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

823 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

824 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

825 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2



828 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 0

829 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

830 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

287

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



831 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

832 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

833 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

834 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2



837 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 380

(GEN.ALARM)

838 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

839 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

840 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

841 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

842 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

843 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2



846 In#1 0 - 3071 － Output signal (0) (0) 371

(GEN.TRIP)

847 In#2 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

848 In#3 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

849 In#4 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

850 In#5 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

851 In#6 0 - 3071 － ditto (0) (0) 0

852 TBO 0.00 - 10.00 s Dl/Dw timer (0.2) (0.2) 0.2

853 Logic OR - AND － LED1 Logic Gate Type OR(0) OR(0) OR(0)

854 Reset Inst - Latch － LED1 Reset operation Inst(0) Inst(0) Inst(0)

855 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED1 Functions 0 0 0

856 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

857 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

858 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0



861 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED2 Functions 0 0 0

862 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

863 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

864 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0



867 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED3 Functions 0 0 0

868 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

869 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

870 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0



873 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED4 Functions 0 0 0

874 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

875 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

876 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0



879 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED5 Functions 0 0 0

880 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

881 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

288

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



882 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0



885 In #1 0 - 3071 － LED6 Functions 0 0 0

886 In #2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

887 In #3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

888 In #4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

889 Color R/G/Y － LED1 Color R R R






895 Color R/G/Y － CB LED Color R R R

896 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED1 Reset operation Inst(0) Inst(0) Inst(0)

897 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED1 Functions 0 0 0

898 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

899 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

900 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

901 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

902 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

903 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

904 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

905 Reset Inst - Latch － Virtual LED2 Reset operation Inst(0) Inst(0) Inst(0)

906 BIT1 0 - 3071 － Virtual LED2 Functions 0 0 0

907 BIT2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

908 BIT3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

909 BIT4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

910 BIT5 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

911 BIT6 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

912 BIT7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

913 BIT8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0 0

289

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix H

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware test

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test

4.2 2F-lock element check

4.3 5F-lock element check

4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test

4.5 Overcurrent element test

4.6 Thermal overload element THR test

4.7 Frequency element FRQ test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

290

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number

Model System frequency

Station Date

Circuit Engineer

Protection scheme Witness

Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

CT shorting contacts

DC power supply

Power up

Wiring

Relay inoperative alarm contact

Calendar and clock

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting Measured current

291

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(2) Percentage restraining characteristic test

Tap setting I1 Measured current (I2)

× Ik

× Ik

(3) Operating time test

Tap setting Test current Measured time

4.2 2f-lock element check

4.3 5f-lock element check

4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test

(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting Measured current

(2) Operating time test

Tap setting Test current Measured time

4.5 Overcurrent element test

(1) OC element

Element Tap setting Measured current

OC

(2) EF element

Element Tap setting Measured current

EF

(3) OCI element

Element Test current Measured operating time

OCI 2 × Is

20 × Is

292

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Is: Setting value

(4) EFI element


EFI 2 × Is

20 × Is

4.6 Thermal overload element THR test


THR

4.7 Frequency element FRQ test

(1) Frequency

Element Setting Measured frequency

FRQ-1

FRQ-2

DFRQ-1

DFRQ-2

5. Protection scheme test

Scheme Results

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

Scheme Results

On load

Tripping circuit

293

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix I

Return Repair Form

294

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRE170 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: Model:

(Example: Type: GRE170 Model: 301A- 10-10 )

Product No.:

Serial No. :

Date:

1. Why the relay is being returned ?

mal-operation

does not operate

increased error

investigation

others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are very helpful information to investigate the incident.

So please provide us with any information concerned with the incident either on CD-ROM, or by completing the Fault Record sheet and Relay Setting sheet attached.

295

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Fault Record Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .

(Example: 04/ June./ 2014 15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values CT1 ratio: kA/: A, CT2 ratio: kA/: A

VT ratio: kV/: V Ia1: kA or A∠ ° Ia2: kA or A∠ ° Ib1: kA or A∠ ° Ib2: kA or A∠ ° Ic1: kA or A∠ ° Ic2: kA or A∠ ° I11: kA or A∠ ° I12: kA or A∠ ° I21: kA or A∠ ° I22: kA or A∠ ° I01: kA or A∠ ° I02: kA or A∠ ° In1: kA or A∠ ° In2: kA or A∠ ° Ia3: kA or A∠ ° Ib3: kA or A∠ ° Ic3: kA or A∠ ° I13: kA or A∠ ° I23: kA or A∠ ° I03: kA or A∠ ° In3: kA or A∠ ° V: kV or V∠ ° Ida: kA or A Id01: kA or A Idb: kA or A Id02: kA or A Idc: kA or A Id03: kA or A

Fault values CT1 ratio: kA/: A, CT2 ratio: kA/: A

VT ratio: kV/: V Ia1: kA or A∠ ° Ia2: kA or A∠ ° Ib1: kA or A∠ ° Ib2: kA or A∠ ° Ic1: kA or A∠ ° Ic2: kA or A∠ ° I11: kA or A∠ ° I12: kA or A∠ ° I21: kA or A∠ ° I22: kA or A∠ ° I01: kA or A∠ ° I02: kA or A∠ ° In1: kA or A∠ ° In2: kA or A∠ ° Ia3: kA or A∠ ° Ib3: kA or A∠ ° Ic3: kA or A∠ ° I13: kA or A∠ ° I23: kA or A∠ ° I03: kA or A∠ ° In3: kA or A∠ ° V: kV or V∠ ° Ida: kA or A Id01: kA or A Idb: kA or A Id02: kA or A Idc: kA or A Id03: kA or A

296

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident.

4. Please provide the details of the incident.

5. Date that the incident occurred.

Day/ Month/ Year: / / /

(Example: 10/ July/ 1998)

6. Please provide any other comments on the GRE170, including documentation.

297

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Customer

Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

298

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix J

Technical Data

299

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

TECHNICAL DATA Ratings AC current 1A or 5A AC voltage 100V, 110V, 115V, 120V Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz DC power supply AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11

DC supply interruption IEC 60255-11 Permissive duration of DC supply voltage interruption to maintain normal operation Restart time Binary input circuit DC voltage

110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc) 220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc) 48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc) 24Vdc/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 to 36Vdc) maximum 12% maximum 50ms at 110Vdc less than 10s For alarm indication

110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc) 48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc) 24- 48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 57.6Vdc)

For trip circuit supervision Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)

≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating) ≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating) ≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)

Overload rating AC current input 4 times rated continuous

100 times rated current for 1s AC voltage input 2 times rated continuous

2.5 times rated for 1s Burden AC current circuit ≤ 0.3VA AC voltage circuit ≤ 0.1VA (at rated voltage) Power supply ≤ 10W (quiescent)

≤ 15W (maximum) Binary input circuit ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc Current differential protection Minimum operate current (ik) 0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps Slope 1 (p1) 10 to 100% in 1% steps Slope 2 (p2) 10 to 200% in 1% steps kp 1.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps Inrush setting (2nd harmonic ratio) (k2f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps Overexcitation setting (5th harmonic ratio) (k5f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps High-set differential overcurrent protection Overcurrent (kh)

2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps

300

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Phase Overcurrent Protection (50P/N, 51P/N) Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection (67)

P/F 1st Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL (IEC 60255-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK

LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time(IEC 60255-151) Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps P/F 2nd Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps P/F 3rd, 4th Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.10 – 150.00A in 0.01A steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps P/F Characteristic Angle: −95° to +95° in 1° steps

Directional Earth Fault Protection (67N) E/F 1st Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.05 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL(IEC 60255-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK

LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time(IEC 60255-151) Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps E/F 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.05 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps E/F 3rd, 4th thresholds: OFF, 0.05 – 100.00A in 0.01A steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps E/F Characteristic angle: −95° to +95° in 1° steps E/F directional voltage threshold: 0.5 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps

Phase Undercurrent Protection (37) Undercurrent 1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps DTL Delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Thermal Overload Protection (49) Iθ = k.IFLC (Thermal setting): Previous load current (IP)

OFF, 0.50 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps 0.00 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps

Thermal unbalamce factor 0 – 10 in 1 step Time constant (τ): 0.5 – 500.0mins in 0.1min steps Thermal alarm: OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps

Inrush Current Detector Second harmonic ratio setting Overcurrent threshold

10 – 50% in 1% steps 1.0 – 25.0A in 0.1A steps

Reverse Power Protection (32) Reverse Power 1st, 2nd threshold: DTL Delay: DO/PU ratio

OFF, -500.0 - -1.0W in 0.1W steps 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps 5 – 98% in 1% steps

CBF Protection (50BF) CBF threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps CBF stage 1 (Backup trip) DTL: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps CBF stage 2 (Re-trip) DTL:

0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps

301

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Protection (46) NOC 1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL(IEC 60255-151): IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK

LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time(IEC 60255-151) Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps NOC Directional voltage threshold 0.5 – 25.0V in 0.1V steps

Overvoltage Protection (59) 1st, 2nd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 60255-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps DO/PU ratio 10 – 98% in 1% steps Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Protection (27) 1st, 2nd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 60255-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Undervoltage Block 5.0 – 20.0Vin 0.1V steps

Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (59N) 1st, 2nd ZOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 160.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 60255-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection (47) 1st, 2nd NOV Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 160.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL(complied with IEC 60255-127) IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 – 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Under/Over Frequency Protection (81U/O) 1st - 4th under/overfrequency threshold (Fnom − 10.00Hz) – (Fnom + 10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps

Fnom: nominal frequency DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps Frequency rate-of-change 0.1 – 15.0Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps

Mechanical Jam Protection Mechanical Jam current threshold OFF, 0.1-25.0A in 0.1A steps. DTL delay:

0.00 – 100.00s in 0.01s steps

Start Protection (48) Motor start protection time: 0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps

302

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Stalled Motor Protection (50S) Stalled Motor current threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 50.00A in 0.01A steps DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Locked Rotor Protection (51LR) Motor start-up current: OFF, 0.10 – 100.00A in 0.01A steps Rotor restraint permissible time: 1 – 300s in 1s steps Rotor permissible heat range:

the ratio from THM1 (stator) 50 – 500% in 1% steps

Restart Inhibit (66) Motor start-up time: 1 – 300s in 1s steps Rotor restraint permissible time: 1 – 300s in 1s steps (Common setting as 51LR) Rotor permissible heat range:

the ratio from THM1 (stator) 50 – 500% in 1% steps (Common setting as 51LR)

Starts per hour: limit number-of-start-up 1 – 60 in 1 steps Accuracy

Current differential element: pick-up Time-overcurrent protection: pick-up Inverse Time Delays: Instantaneous Time Delays Voltage protection Frequency protection: pick-up

100% of setting ±5% 100% of setting ± 5% (GS>0.2A) IEC60255-151, ±5% or 50ms (2 ≤ G/GS ≤ 20) GT = 1.1GS GD = 20GS (GS ≤ 10A), 200A (GS > 10A) ≤50ms (DT, TMS=0s) ±5% ±5%

Front Communication port - local PC (USB) Connector type: USB-Type B Cable length: 5m (max.)

Rear Communication port (RS485) RS485 I/F for Modbus and IEC60870-5-103: Connection Cable type Cable length Connection

Isolation Transmission rate

Multidrop (max. 32 relays) Twisted pair cable with shield 1200m (max.) Screw terminals 1kVac for 1 min. 9.6, 19.2kbps

Rear Communication port (Ethernet) 100BASE-TX 100BASE-FX

RJ-45 connector SC connector

Time synchronization port (IRIG-B port) IRIG Time Code Input impedance Input voltage range Connector type Cable type

IRIG-B122 4k-ohm 4Vp-p to 10Vp-p Screw terminal 50 ohm coaxial cable

Binary Inputs Number Operating voltage

6 (xx0 model) / 12 (xx1 model) / 18 (xx2 model) For indication

303

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating Typical 77Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating Typical 33.6Vdc(min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating

For trip circuit supervision ≥88V for 220Vdc rating ≥38.4V for 110Vdc rating ≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating ≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating

Binary Outputs Number 4 (xx0 model) / 10 (xx1 model) / 16 (xx2 model) Ratings: model 4∗0 and 7∗0: BO1 and BO2 model 4∗1 and 7∗1: BO1, BO2, BO5 and BO6 model 4∗2 and 7∗2: BO1, BO2, BO5, BO6, BO11

and BO12 other BOs

Make and carry: 5A continuously Contac : 0.4A 250Vdc, 8A 380Vac, 3040VA, 150W Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≥40ms) Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Make and carry: 4A continuously Contact: 0.2A 110Vdc, 8A 250Vac, 2000VA, 240W

Durability: Loaded contact: ≥1,000 operations Unloaded contact: ≥10,000 operations

Pickup time Less than 15ms Reset time Less than 10ms

Mechanical design Weight 2.5kg (4x0 /7x0 model) 3.0kg (4x2/7x2 model) Width 223mm Height 177mm Depth 180mm Case colour Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5 Installation

Flush mounting with attachment kits

ENVIROMENTAL PERFORMANCE Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2

IEC60068-2-30 Operating range: -20°C to +60°C. Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.

Humidity IEC60068-2-78 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity. Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP52(front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)

Mechanical Environment Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 2

Endurance - Class 1 Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 2

Shock Withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1

Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1

Electrical Environment Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.

304

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Test Standards Details 2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits. 1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak), for CT, Power Supply Unit , BI and BO circuits; between terminals and earth, and between independent circuits. 3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth 3kV (peal) for BO circuit ; across normally open contacts 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment High Frequency Disturbance / Damped Oscillatory Wave

IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, IEC61000-4-12 IEEE C37. 90. 1

1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV(peak) applied to all ports in common mode. 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Electrostatic Discharge

IEC60255-22-2 Class 3, IEC61000-4-2

6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.

Radiated RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, IEC61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900 and 1890MHz.

Fast Transient Disturbance

IEC60255-22-4 Class A, IEC61000-4-4 IEEE C37. 90. 1

4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.

Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, IEC61000-4-5

1.2/50µs surge in common/differential modes: HV, Power Supply Unit and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak) RS485 port: 1kV (peak)

Conducted RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, IEC61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz. Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency Disturbance

IEC60255-22-7 Class A, IEC61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode. 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode. Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and Radiated Emissions

IEC60255-25 Class A, EN55022 Class A, IEC61000-6-4

Conducted emissions: 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean) 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean) Radiated emissions (at 10m): 30 to 230MHz: <40dB 230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC Compliance with the European ommission Low Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard EN 60255-27.

305

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix K

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

306

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:

Signal names Marked with : Measuring element output signal

Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch

Marked with " " : Scheme switch position

Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

A B C Output 1 1 1 1

Other cases 0


Other cases 0


Other cases 0

OR gates


Other cases 1


Other cases 1


Other cases 1

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

&

307

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Signal inversion

A Output 0 1

1 0

Timer Delaye pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delaye pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting


One-shot timer


Flip-flop S R Output 0 0 No change 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

Scheme switch A Switch Output 1 ON 1

Other cases 0

Switch Output

ON 1 OFF 0

0 t

XXX

t 0

XXX

0 t

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY

t 0

Output

Output

ON

ON

+

A

S Output F/F

R

Output A 1

XXX - YYY

A Output A

Output

308

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix L IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

309

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEC60870-5-103 Configurator IEC103 configurator software is included in the same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily as follows:

Installation of IEC103 Configurator Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.

Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and operate it according to the message.

When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start menu.

Starting IEC103 Configurator

Click [Start]→[Programs]→[IEC103 Configurator]→[IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator software.

Note: The instruction manual for the IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking the [Help]→[Manual] in the IEC103 Configurator.

Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station Polling cycle: 150ms or more

IEC103 master GR relay

Data request

Data request

Response frame

Response frame

Polling cycle: 150ms or more

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 1. Physical Layer 1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485

Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment

1.2 Optical interface

1.3 Transmission speed

User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s

2. Application Layer COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU

One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

3. List of Information The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”. (For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)

310

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number), COT

CAUTION: Register Items into No.1 – 64. It becomes invalid when it registers after No.65. - Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),

COT, Type of measurand quantities

- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)

- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of measurand quantities

- Common setting

• Transmission cycle of Measurand frame • FUN of System function • Test mode, etc.

CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via USB, turn off the DC supply to the relay and turn on again.

3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface 3.1.1 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.

3.1.2 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.

3.1.3 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can be customized.

3.1.4 Commands

The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported commands with a cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.


3.1.5 Test mode

In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’. This means that the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).


3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction

If blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and measurands are no longer transmitted.


311

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3.2 List of Information The following are the default settings.

IEC103 Configurator Default settingINF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI

ID Signal No. OFF ONStandard Information numbers in monitor directionSystem Function

0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --

0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --

2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 234 -- -- --

3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 234 -- -- --

4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 234 -- -- --

5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported

Status Indications

16 Auto-recloser active If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is setactive, if impossible, inactive. Not supported

17 Teleprotection active If protection using telecommunication is available,this item is set to active. If not, set to inactive. Not supported

18 Protection active If the protection is available, this item is set toactive. If not, set to inactive. GI 1 1, 7, 12 234 1413 1 2

19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 7, 11, 12 234 1409 -- 2

20 Monitor direction blocked Block the 103 transmission from a relay to controlsystem. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg. GI 1 11 234 1241 1 2

21 Test mode Transmission of testmode situation froma relay tocontrol system. IECTST "ON" setting. GI 1 11 234 1242 1 2

22 Local parameter Setting When a setting change has done at the local, theevent is sent to control system. Not supported

23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 234 1243 1 2

24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 1, 7, 11, 12 234 1244 1 2

25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active Not supported

26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active Not supported

27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set




Supervision Indications32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 7 234 1266 1 2

33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 7 234 1268 1 2

35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 7 234 1269 1 2

36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 7 234 1270 1 2

37 I>>backup operation Not supported

38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported

39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported

46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7 234 1259 1 2

47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7 234 1252 1 2

Earth Fault Indications48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault GI 1 1, 7 234 800 1 2

49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault GI 1 1, 7 234 801 1 2

50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault GI 1 1, 7 234 802 1 2

51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward GI 1 1, 7 234 803 1 2

52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse GI 1 1, 7 234 804 1 2

312

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEC103 Configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI ID Signal NO. OFF ON

Fault Indications64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 234 805 1 2

65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 234 806 1 2

66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 234 807 1 2

67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7 234 808 1 2

68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1, 7 234 371 -- 2

69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 234 372 -- 2

70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip -- 2 1, 7 234 373 -- 2

71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip -- 2 1, 7 234 374 -- 2

72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip No set

73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location Not supported

74 Fault forward/line Forward fault -- 2 1, 7 234 816 -- 2

75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault -- 2 1, 7 234 817 -- 2

76 Teleprotection Signaltransmitted Carrier signal sending Not supported

77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported

78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported






84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7 234 1279 1 2

85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip -- 2 1, 7 234 818 -- 2

86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported



89 Trip measuring system E Not supported

90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip -- 2 1, 7 234 819 -- 2

91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip -- 2 1, 7 234 820 -- 2

92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip -- 2 1, 7 234 821 -- 2

93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip -- 2 1, 7 234 822 -- 2

Autoreclose indications128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported

129 CB 'ON' by long-timeAutoreclose Not supported

130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported

313

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEC103 configurator Default settingINF Description Contents GI Type

ID COT FUN Max. No.

Measurands144 Measurand I Ib1 <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 234 1

145 Measurand I,V Ib1, Vab <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 234 2

146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Ib1, Vab, P, Q <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 234 4

147 Measurand IN,VEN Ie, Ve <meaurand I> -- 3 2, 7 234 2

148 Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,P,Q,f

Ia,1 Ib1, Ic1, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand<meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 234 9

Generic Function240 Read Headings Not supported

241 Read attributes of all entriesof a group Not supported

243 Read directory of entry Not supported

244 Real attribute of entry Not supported

245 End of GGI Not supported

249 Write entry with confirm Not supported

250 Write entry with execute Not supported

251 Write entry aborted Not supported

Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit Coeff

Lower Upper144 Ib 1 80 long 0 4095 2.048145 Ib 1 80 long 0 4095 2.048

Vab 1 24 long 0 4095 1.86182

146 Ib 1 80 long 0 4095 2.048

Vab 1 24 long 0 4095 1.8618P 1 392 long -4096 4095 0.000645

Q 1 400 long -4096 4095 0.000645

147 Ie 1 304 long 0 4095 2.048

Ve 1 296 long 0 4095 1.07507

148 Ia 1 72 long 0 4095 2.048

Ib 1 80 long 0 4095 2.048

Ic 1 88 long 0 4095 2.048

Va 1 0 long 0 4095 3.2252

Vb 1 8 long 0 4095 3.2252

Vc 1 16 long 0 4095 3.2252

P 1 392 long -4096 4095 0.000645

Q 1 400 long -4096 4095 0.000645

f 1 360 long 0 4095 0.68267

314

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEC103 Configurator Default settingControl

directionType

ID COT FUN

Selection of standard information numbers in control directionSystem functions

0 Initiation of generalinterrogation -- 7 9 255

0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255

General commands16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported

17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported

18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 234

19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 234

23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 234

24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 234

25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 Not supported

26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 Not supported

27 CB OPEN No set

28 CB CLOSE No set

29 INTERLOCK ON / OFF No set

30 OPERATION ENABLE No set

Generic functions

240 Read headings of all definedgroups Not supported

241 Read values or attributes ofall entries of one group Not supported

243 Read directory of a singleentry Not supported

244 Read values or attributes of asingle entry Not supported

245 General Interrogation ofgeneric data Not supported

248 Write entry Not supported

249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported

250 Write entry with execution Not supported

INF Description Contents

(∗1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, the "IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Details of Command settings in the IEC103 configurator

INF DCOSig off Sig on Rev Valid time

16 0 0 0

17 0 0 0

18 2686 2686 ✓ 0

19 0 2688 200

23 0 2640 1000

24 0 2641 1000

27 0 0 0

29 0 0 0

30 0 0 0

31 0 0 0 ✓: signal reverse

315

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Description Contents GRE140supported Comment

Basic application functionsTest mode Yes

Blocking of monitor direction Yes

Disturbance data No

Generic services No

Private data No

Miscellaneous

Measurand Max. MVAL = ratedvalue times

Current L1 Ia Configurable

Current L2 Ib Configurable

Current L3 Ic Configurable

Voltage L1-E Va Configurable

Voltage L2-E Vb Configurable

Voltage L3-E Vc Configurable

Active power P P Configurable

Reactive power Q Q Configurable

Frequency f f Configurable

Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No set

Details of Common settings in the IEC103 configurator - Setting file’s remark: IGRE170AA000 - Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000 - Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000 - Measurand period [s]: 2 - Function type of System functions: 219 - Signal No. of Test mode: 1242 - Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279 - Signal No. of CB OPEN: 2690 - Signal No. of CB CLOSE: 2691 - Signal No. of INTERLOCK: 2692 - Signal No. of OPERATION ENABLE: 2693

316

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

[Legend] GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3) Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1) 1 : time-tagged message 2 : time-tagged message with relative time 3 : measurands I 4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 : identification 6 : time synchronization 8 : general interrogation termination 9 : measurands II 10: generic data 11: generic identification 20: general command 23: list of recorded disturbances 26: ready for transmission for disturbance data 27: ready for transmission of a channel 28: ready for transmission of tags 29: transmission of tags 30: transmission of disturbance values 31: end of transmission COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3) 1: spontaneous 2: cyclic 3: reset frame count bit (FCB) 4: reset communication unit (CU) 5: start / restart 6: power on 7: test mode 8: time synchronization 9: general interrogation 10: termination of general interrogation 11: local operation 12: remote operation 20: positive acknowledgement of command 21: negative acknowledgement of command 31: transmission of disturbance data 40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command 41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command 42: valid data response to generic read command 43: invalid data response to generic read command 44: generic write confirmation FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1) DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5) DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)

317

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:

(1) Naming for IEC103setting data

The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. It is recommended that the version name is provided with a revision number in order to be able to accommodate future changes as follows:

First draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_01.csv

Second draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_02.csv

Third draft: ∗∗∗∗∗∗_03.csv

Revision number

The name “∗∗∗∗∗∗” is recommended in order to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRE170. The setting file’s remark field for IEC103 can accept up to 12 one-byte characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.

(2) Saving the IEC103 setting data

It is recommended that IEC103 setting data is saved on electronic media, and should not be left in a folder.

318

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix M

Modbus: Interoperability

319

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Modbus: Interoperability 1. Physical and Data Link Layer

- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface - RTU mode only - Coding System: 8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit) Even parity - Address setting range: 1-247 - Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200 2. Application Layer

(1) Modbus response format

FC

Description Supplementary explanation

01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag

02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.

03 Read Holding Registers -

04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs

05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization

06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number

07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status

08 Diagnostic -

16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc.

17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID

43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information

For FC (Function Code) = 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".

320

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

For other FCs, the response format is as following:

07 Read Exception status Response Data Output Data (1byte)

bit Description 0 IN SERVICE (LED) 1 TRIP (LED) 2 ALARM (LED) 3 RELAY FAIL (LED) 4 CB CLOSED (LED) 5 CB OPEN (LED) 6 Relay fail output (BO) 7 <Reserved>

321

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

08 Diagnostic

Response Data SC Response Data Field Description 00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data 01 <not supported> 02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register bit0 IN SERVICE (LED) bit1 TRIP (LED) bit2 ALARM (LED) bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED) bit4 <Reserved> bit5 <Reserved> bit6 <Reserved> bit7 <Reserved> bit8 CT1 3-phase current balance alarm bit9 CT2 3-phase current balance alarm bit10 Trip Circuit Supervision alarm bit11 CB contact status alarm bit12 CB operation number alarm bit13 CB operating time alarm bit14 ∑Iy monitoring alarm bit15 <Reserved> 03,04 <not supported> 10 counter number reset (SC:11～15) 11 “OK” number of CRC 12 “NG” number of CRC 13 <Reserved> 14 Normal response number 15 Broad cast receive number 16 Abnormal response number

322

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

17 Report Slave ID

Response Data Byte Count (1byte) 18bytes Slave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID GRE170-□□□A-□□-□□ ASCII Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service

43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)

Response Data Param OID 01 Basic device identification 00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name 01 GRE170-□□□ Product Code 02 A Major Minor Revision 02 Regular device identification 03 <Non> Vendor URL 04 GRE170 Product Name 05 □□□A-□□-□□ Model Name 06 MACHINE PROTECTION RELAY User Application Name 07- <Reserved> Reserved 03 Extended device identification 80 <SPASE> 81 GS1EM1-07-□ Software version

323

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(2) Modbus address map group

Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification

Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)

(Read/Write) 0x0400 5 Remote control (command, interlock), Time synchronization, Clear command (write only)

Discrete Input 0x1000 18 BI

0x1016 17 Relay fail output, BO

(Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)

0x1080 16 Virtual LED

0x1200 3072 Signal list (see Appendix B for detail)

0x1E00 32 Digest Coils

Input Registers 0x2000 210

Analog data (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Thermal, Ia max etc., unconverted to engineering units) 2-word long (Read Only)

0x2700 3 Time sync status

0x3C00 32 Digest Registers

Holding Registers

0x2800 102 Fault record (No., Time), max. 10 records, write protected

0x3000 264 Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records, write protected

(Read/Write) 0x3400 72 Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200 records, write protected

0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format)

0x3810 24 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long

0x3830 11 Motor Parameter

0x3E00 64 Digest Alias

0x3E80 4 Password for remote control

0x3F00 2 Setting value for remote

0x4000 3952 Setting value (see Appendix G for detail)

Discrete Inputs Single bit Read-Only Coils Single bit Read-Write Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write

324

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(3)Modbus address map Address Description Supplementary explanation

Coils Remote control (R/W) 0200 Remote control enable flag 0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on)

0403 Time synchronization command Call time synchronization task (on)

0404 Trip LED reset commnd Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on) 0405 Motor Para. Clear Clear parameter (on) (write only) Discrete Input BI status (R) 1000 BI1 1001 BI2 1002 BI3 1003 BI4 1004 BI5 1005 BI6 1006 BI7 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 1007 BI8 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 1008 BI9 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 1009 BI10 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 100A BI11 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 100B BI12 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 100C BI13 Only for GRE170-xx2 100D BI14 Only for GRE170-xx2 100E BI15 Only for GRE170-xx2 100F BI16 Only for GRE170-xx2 1010 BI17 Only for GRE170-xx2 1011 BI18 Only for GRE170-xx2 BO status (R) 1016 Relay fail output 1017 BO1 1018 BO2 1019 BO3 101A BO4 101B BO5 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 101C BO6 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 101D BO7 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 101E BO8 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 101F BO9 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 1020 BO10 Only for GRE170-xx1 and GRE170-xx2 1021 BO11 Only for GRE170-xx2 1022 BO12 Only for GRE170-xx2

325

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Address Description Supplementary explanation

1023 BO13 Only for GRE170-xx2 1024 BO14 Only for GRE170-xx2 1025 BO15 Only for GRE170-xx2 1026 BO16 Only for GRE170-xx2 LED lamp status (R) 1040 IN SERVICE 1041 TRIP 1042 ALARM 1043 RELAY FAIL 1044 CB CLOSED 1045 CB OPEN 1046 LOCAL 1047 REMOTE 1048 LED1 1049 LED2 104A LED3 104B LED4 104C LED5 104D LED6 Virtual LED status (R) 1080 IND1 BIT1 1081 IND1 BIT2 1082 IND1 BIT3 1083 IND1 BIT4 1084 IND1 BIT5 1085 IND1 BIT6 1086 IND1 BIT7 1087 IND1 BIT8 1088 IND2 BIT1 1089 IND2 BIT2 108A IND2 BIT3 108B IND2 BIT4 108C IND2 BIT5 108D IND2 BIT6 108E IND2 BIT7 108F IND2 BIT8 Signal list (R) 1200 Signal No.0 See Appendix B 1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix B 1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix B … Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix B

1DFF Signal No.3071 Digest Alias

1E00 Ailias coil #1 1E1F Ailias coil #32

326

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Input Registers Analog data (R) The following are NOT converted to engineering units. 2000 Ia1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2001 Ia1 (L) 2002 <Reserved> 2003 <Reserved> 2004 Ib1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2005 Ib1 (L) 2006 <Reserved> 2007 <Reserved> 2008 Ic1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2009 Ic1 (L) 200A <Reserved> 200B <Reserved> 200C Ie (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CTn1(A) 200D Ie (L) 200E <Reserved> 200F <Reserved> 2010 Ise (H) Primary: value×LSB×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×LSB×CTn1(A) 2011 Ise (L) 2012 <Reserved> 2013 <Reserved> 2014 I01 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2015 I01 (L) 2016 <Reserved> 2017 <Reserved> 2018 I11 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2019 I11 (L) 201A <Reserved> 201B <Reserved> 201C I21 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 201D I21 (L) 201E <Reserved> 201F <Reserved> 2020 I2/I11 (H)

value×0.001 2021 I2/I11 (L) 2022 Ia2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA) 2023 Ia2 (L) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 2024 <Reserved> 2025 <Reserved> 2026 Ib2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA) 2027 Ib2 (L) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 2028 <Reserved>

2029 <Reserved>

327

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


202A Ic2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 202B Ic2 (L)

202C <Reserved> 202D <Reserved> 202E I02 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 202F I02 (L) 2030 <Reserved> 2031 <Reserved> 2032 I12 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)


Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 2037 I22 (L) 2038 <Reserved> 2039 <Reserved> 203A I2/I12 (H)

value×0.001 203B I2/I12 (L) 203C Thermal (H)

value×0.01(%) 203D Thermal (L) 203E Va(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 203F Va(L) 2040 <Reserved> 2041 <Reserved> 2042 Vb(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2043 Vb(L) 2044 <Reserved> 2045 <Reserved> 2046 Vc(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2047 Vc(L) 2048 <Reserved> 2049 <Reserved> 204A Ve(H) Primary: value×0.06×VEVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 204B Ve(L) 204C <Reserved> 204D <Reserved> 204E Vab(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 204F Vab(L) 2050 <Reserved> 2051 <Reserved> 2052 Vbc(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2053 Vbc(L) 2054 <Reserved>

2055 <Reserved>

328

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


2056 Vca(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV) Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2057 Vca(L)

2058 <Reserved> 2059 <Reserved> 205A V0(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 205B V0(L) 205C <Reserved> 205D <Reserved> 205E V1(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 205F V1(L) 2060 <Reserved> 2061 <Reserved> 2062 V2(H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2063 V2(L) 2064 <Reserved> 2065 <Reserved> 2066 Ida (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 2067 Ida (L) 2068 Idb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 2069 Idb (L) 206A Idc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 206B Idc (L) 206C Ira (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 206D Ira (L) 206E Irb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 206F Irb (L) 2070 Irc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 2071 Irc (L) 2072 f(H)

value×0.01(Hz) 2073 f(L) 2074 df(H)

value×0.01(Hz) 2075 df(L) 2076 PF(H)

value×0.001 2077 PF(L) 2078 P(H)

value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT) ×PVT÷1000(kW) 2079 P(L) 207A Q(H)

value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT) ×PVT÷1000(kvar) 207B Q(L) 207C S(H)

value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT) ×PVT÷1000(kVA) 207D S(L) 207E Ia1 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 207F Ia1 max (L) 2080 Ib1 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2081 Ib1 max (L)

329

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


2082 Ic1 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2083 Ic1 max (L)

2084 Ie max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CTn1(A) 2085 Ie max (L)

2086 Ise max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CTn1(A) 2087 Ise max (L)

2088 I21 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 2089 I21 max (L)

208A I2/I11 max (H) value×0.001

208B I2/I11 max (L) 208C Ia2 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 208D Ia2 max (L) 208E Ib2 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 208F Ib2 max (L) 2090 Ic2 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 2091 Ic2 max (L) 2092 I22 max (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 2093 I22 max (L) 2094 I2/I12 max (H)

value×0.001 2095 I2/I12 max (L) 2096 Va max (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2097 Va max (L) 2098 Va min (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 2099 Va min (L) 209A Vb max (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 209B Vb max (L) 209C Vb min (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 209D Vb min (L) 209E Vc max (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 209F Vc max (L) 20A0 Vc min (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 20A1 Vc min (L) 20A2 Ve max (H) Primary: value×0.06×VEVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 20A3 Ve max (L) 20A4 Ve min (H) Primary: value×0.06×VEVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 20A5 Ve min (L) 20A6 V0 max (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 20A7 V0 max (L) 20A8 V0 min (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 20A9 V0 min (L) 20AA f max (H)

value×0.01(Hz) 20AB f max (L) 20AC f min (H)

value×0.01(Hz) 20AD f min (L) 20AE P max (H) value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)×PVT÷1000(kW)

330

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


20AF P max (L) 20B0 Q max (H)

value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)×PVT÷1000(kvar) 20B1 Q max (L) 20B2 S max (H)

value×0.0012×0.06×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)×PVT÷1000(kVA) 20B3 S max (L) 20B4 Ia dir (H)

20B5 Ia dir (L) 20B6 Ib dir (H)

20B7 Ib dir (L) 20B8 Ic dir (H)

20B9 Ic dir (L) 20BA Ie dir (H)

20BB Ie dir (L) 20BC Ise dir (H)

20BD Ise dir (L) 20BE I2 dir (H)

20BF I2 dir (L) 20C0 Thermal2 (H)

value×0.01(%) 20C1 Thermal2 (L) 20C2 Wh+ (H)

(Wh+) value + (Wh+ counter) value×106 20C3 Wh+ (L) 20C4 Wh+ counter (H) 20C5 Wh+ counter (L) 20C6 Wh- (H)

(Wh-) value + (Wh- counter) value ×106 20C7 Wh- (L) 20C8 Wh- counter (H) 20C9 Wh- counter (L) 20CA varh+ (H)

(varh+) value + (varh+ counter) value×106 20CB varh+ (L) 20CC varh+ counter (H) 20CD varh+ counter (L) 20CE varh- (H)

(varh-) value + (varh- counter) value ×106 20CF varh- (L) 20D0 varh- counter (H) 20D1 varh- counter (L) Holding Registers Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time.

2800 records count Number of records saved (maximum save number is changed by save time)

2801 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 20 records) 2802 No.X Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2803 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2804 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2805 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2806 year 0-99(y)

331

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


2807 No.X+1 Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2808 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2809 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 280A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 280B year 0-99(y) 280C No.X+2 Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 280D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 280E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 280F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2810 Action 1:on 、2:off 2811 No.X+3 Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2812 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2813 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2814 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2815 year 0-99(y) 2816 No.X+4 Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2817 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2818 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2819 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 281A year 0-99(y) 281B No.X+5 Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 281C milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 281D hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 281E months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 281F year 0-99(y) 2820 No.X+6 Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2821 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2822 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2823 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2824 year 0-99(y) 2825 No.X+7 Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2826 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2827 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2828 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2829 year 0-99(y) 282A No.X+8 Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 282B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 282C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 282D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 282E year 0-99(y) 282F No.X+9 Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2830 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2831 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2832 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2833 year 0-99(y)

332

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


2834 No.X+10 Returns "Set No.+10". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2835 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2836 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2837 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2838 year 0-99(y) 2839 No.X+11 Returns "Set No.+11". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 283A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 283B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 283C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 283D year 0-99(y) 283E No.X+12 Returns "Set No.+12". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 283F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2840 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2841 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2842 year 0-99(y) 2843 No.X+13 Returns "Set No.+13". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2844 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2845 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2846 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2847 year 0-99(y) 2848 No.X+14 Returns "Set No.+14". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2849 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 284A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 284B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 284C year 0-99(y) 284D No.X+15 Returns "Set No.+15". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 284E milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 284F hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2850 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2851 year 0-99(y) 2852 No.X+16 Returns "Set No.+16". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2853 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2854 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2855 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2856 year 0-99(y) 2857 No.X+17 Returns "Set No.+17". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2858 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2859 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 285A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 285B year 0-99(y) 285C No.X+18 Returns "Set No.+18". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 285D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 285E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 285F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2860 year 0-99(y)

333

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


2861 No.X+19 Returns "Set No.+19". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 2862 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 2863 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 2864 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 2865 year 0-99(y) Fault record (R) 3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 8) 3001 No. (R/W) Indication of record #1. If no data, all following data are set to 0. 3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3005 year 0-99(y) 3006 <Reserved> 3007 Trip mode1 (H) 3008 Trip mode1 (L) 3009 Trip mode2 (H) 300A Trip mode2 (L) 300B Trip phase 300C <Reserved> 300D <Reserved> Pre-fault value 300E Ia1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 300F Ia1 (L) 3010 <Reserved> 3011 <Reserved> 3012 Ib1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)


Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 3017 Ic1 (L) 3018 <Reserved> 3019 <Reserved> 301A Ie (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CTn1(A) 301B Ie (L) 301C <Reserved> 301D <Reserved> 301E Ise (H) Primary: value×LSB×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×LSB×CT1(A) 301F Ise (L) 3020 <Reserved> 3021 <Reserved> 3022 I01 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 3023 I01 (L) 3024 <Reserved> 3025 <Reserved>

334

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


3026 I11 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA) Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 3027 I11 (L)

3028 <Reserved> 3029 <Reserved> 302A I21 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 302B I21 (L) 302C <Reserved> 302D <Reserved> 302E I2/I11 (H)

value×0.001 302F I2/I11 (L) 3030 Ia2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)



Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 3039 Ic2 (L) 303A <Reserved> 303B <Reserved> 303C I02 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 303D I02 (L) 303E <Reserved> 303F <Reserved> 3040 I12 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)


Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 3045 I22 (L) 3046 <Reserved> 3047 <Reserved> 3048 I2/I12 (H)

value×0.001 3049 I2/I12 (L) 304A Va (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 304B Va (L) 304C <Reserved> 304D <Reserved> 304E Vb (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 304F Vb (L) 3050 <Reserved> 3051 <Reserved> 3052 Vc (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

335

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


3053 Vc (L) Secondary: value×0.06(V) 3054 <Reserved> 3055 <Reserved> 3056 Ve (H) Primary: value×0.06×VEVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 3057 Ve (L) 2058 <Reserved> 3059 <Reserved> 305A Vab (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 305B Vab (L) 305C <Reserved> 305D <Reserved> 305E Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 305F Vbc (L) 3060 <Reserved> 3061 <Reserved> 3062 Vca (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 3063 Vca (L) 3064 <Reserved> 3065 <Reserved> 3066 V0 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 3067 V0 (L) 3068 <Reserved> 3069 <Reserved> 306A V1 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 306B V1 (L) 306C <Reserved> 306D <Reserved> 306E V2 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 306F V2 (L) 3070 <Reserved> 3071 <Reserved> 3072 Ida (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 3073 Ida (L) 3074 Idb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 3075 Idb (L) 3076 Idc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 3077 Idc (L) 3078 Ira (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 3079 Ira (L) 307A Irb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 307B Irb (L) 307C Irc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 307D Irc (L) 307E f (H)

value×0.01(Hz) 307F f (L)

336

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


3080 df (H) value×0.01(Hz)

3081 df (L) 3082 PF (H)

value×0.001 3083 PF (L) Fault value 3084 Ia1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)


Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 3089 Ib1 (L) 308A <Reserved> 308B <Reserved> 308C Ic1 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 308D Ic1 (L) 308E <Reserved> 308F <Reserved> 3090 Ie (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CTn1(A) 3091 Ie (L) 3092 <Reserved> 3093 <Reserved> 3094 Ise (H) Primary: value×LSB×CTn1×1nCT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×LSB×CTn1(A) 3095 Ise (L) 3096 <Reserved> 3097 <Reserved> 3098 I01 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 3099 I01 (L) 309A <Reserved> 309B <Reserved> 309C I11 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 309D I11 (L) 309E <Reserved> 309F <Reserved> 30A0 I21 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1×1CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT1(A) 30A1 I21 (L)

30A2 <Reserved>

30A3 <Reserved>

30A4 I2/I11 (H) value×0.001

30A5 I2/I11 (L) 30A6 Thermal (H)

value×0.01(%) 30A7 Thermal (L) 30A8 Ia2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30A9 Ia2 (L)

337

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


30AA <Reserved> 30AB <Reserved> 30AC Ib2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30AD Ib2 (L) 30AE <Reserved> 30AF <Reserved> 30B0 Ic2 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30B1 Ic2 (L) 30B2 <Reserved> 30B3 <Reserved> 30B4 I02 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30B5 I02 (L) 30B6 <Reserved> 30B7 <Reserved> 30B8 I12 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30B9 I12 (L) 30BA <Reserved> 30BB <Reserved> 30BC I22 (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT2×2CT÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012×CT2(A) 30BD I22 (L) 30BE <Reserved> 30BF <Reserved> 30C0 I2/I12 (H)

value×0.001 30C1 I2/I12 (L) 30C2 Va (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30C3 Va (L) 30C4 <Reserved> 30C5 <Reserved> 30C6 Vb (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30C7 Vb (L) 30C8 <Reserved> 30C9 <Reserved> 30CA Vc (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30CB Vc (L) 30CC <Reserved> 30CD <Reserved> 30CE Ve (H) Primary: value×0.06×VEVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30CF Ve (L) 30D0 <Reserved> 30D1 <Reserved> 30D2 Vab (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30D3 Vab (L) 30D4 <Reserved> 30D5 <Reserved> 30D6 Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

338

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


30D7 Vbc (L) Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30D8 <Reserved> 30D9 <Reserved> 30DA Vca (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30DB Vca (L) 30DC <Reserved> 30DD <Reserved> 30DE V0 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30DF V0 (L) 30E0 <Reserved> 30E1 <Reserved> 30E2 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30E3 V1 (L) 30E4 <Reserved> 30E5 <Reserved> 30E6 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.06×PVT÷1000(kV)

Secondary: value×0.06(V) 30E7 V2 (L) 30E8 <Reserved> 30E9 <Reserved> 30EA Ida (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30EB Ida (L) 30EC Idb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30ED Idb (L) 30EE Idc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30EF Idc (L) 30F0 Ira (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30F1 Ira (L) 30F2 Irb (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30F3 Irb (L) 30F4 Irc (H) Primary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2)×1CT(or2CT)÷1000(kA)

Secondary:value×0.01×CT1(orCT2) 30F5 Irc (L) 30F6 f (H)

value×0.01(Hz) 30F7 f (L) 30F8 df (H)

value×0.01(Hz) 30F9 df (L) 30FA PF (H)

value×0.001 30FB PF (L) Motor parameter 30FC second Motor start-up time 30FD hours / minutes 0-23(h), 0-59(m) 30FE mouths 1-12(m), 1-31(d) 30FF year 0-99(y) 3100 Thermal2 (H)

value×0.01(%) 3101 Thermal2 (L) 3102 Hotst (H) Hot start number

339

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


3103 Hotst (L) 3104 Coldst (H)

Cold start number 3105 Coldst (L) 3106 Peakst (H)

Peak current value at start-up value×0.0012(A) 3107 Peakst (L) Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format 3800 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3801 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3803 year 0-99(y) Counters (R/W) 3810 Trips any phase (H)

Can be set initial value. 3811 Trips any phase (L) 3812 Trips Phase-A (H)

Can be set initial value. 3813 Trips Phase-A (L) 3814 Trips Phase-B (H)

Can be set initial value. 3815 Trips Phase-B (L) 3816 Trips Phase-C (H)

Can be set initial value. 3817 Trips Phase-C (L) 3818 ∑Iy A (H)

Can be set initial value. 3819 ∑Iy A (L) 381A ∑Iy B (H)

Can be set initial value. 381B ∑Iy B (L) 381C ∑Iy C (H)

Can be set initial value. 381D ∑Iy C (L) 381E <Reserved> 381F <Reserved> 3820 Hot starts (H)

Can be set initial value. 3821 Hot starts (L) 3822 Cold starts (H)

Can be set initial value. 3823 Cold starts (L) 3824 <Reserved> 3825 <Reserved> 3826 <Reserved> 3827 <Reserved> 3828 Motor start-up time 3830 Millseconds 0-59999 3831 hours / minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3832 months / days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3833 year 0-99(y) Motor operating time (R/W) 3834 seconds Can be set initial value. 3835 minutes Can be set initial value. 3836 hours (H) Can be set initial value.

340

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


3837 hours (L) Motor peak start-up curremt 3838 Peak start-up current (H) Primary: value×0.0012×CT1÷1000(kA)

Secondary: value×0.0012 (A) 3839 Peak start-up current (L) Motor status 383A Motor LED 1;Stop, 2;Start-up, 3; Running Password 3E80 Setting (H)

Pass word for Setting 3E81 Setting (L) 3E82 Control (H)

Pass word for Control 3E83 Control (L) Setting values

4000 See the next table for setting values. 4000

341

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

(4) Modbus address for setting values Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

Disturbance Record

49C0 Time1 Disturbance record period before fault 49C1 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault 49C2 OC Setting for disturbance record 49C4 EF Setting for disturbance record 49DB SEF Setting for disturbance record 49DC NOC Setting for disturbance record 49FC OV Setting for disturbance record 49FD UV Setting for disturbance record 49DD ZOV Setting for disturbance record 49DE NOV Setting for disturbance record 49C6 Trip Disturbance trigger 49C8 OC Disturbance trigger 49CA EF Disturbance trigger 49DF SEF Disturbance trigger 49E0 NOC Disturbance trigger 49CC 2f Disturbance trigger 49CD 5f Disturbance trigger 49D1 OV Disturbance trigger 49D2 UV Disturbance trigger 49E1 ZOV Disturbance trigger 49E2 NOV Disturbance trigger 4A10 SIG1 Disturbance record signal 4A11 SIG2 Disturbance record signal 4A12 SIG3 Disturbance record signal 4A13 SIG4 Disturbance record signal 4A14 SIG5 Disturbance record signal 4A15 SIG6 Disturbance record signal 4A16 SIG7 Disturbance record signal 4A17 SIG8 Disturbance record signal 4A18 SIG9 Disturbance record signal 4A19 SIG10 Disturbance record signal 4A1A SIG11 Disturbance record signal 4A1B SIG12 Disturbance record signal 4A1C SIG13 Disturbance record signal 4A1D SIG14 Disturbance record signal 4A1E SIG15 Disturbance record signal 4A1F SIG16 Disturbance record signal 4A20 SIG17 Disturbance record signal 4A21 SIG18 Disturbance record signal 4A22 SIG19 Disturbance record signal 4A23 SIG20 Disturbance record signal 4A24 SIG21 Disturbance record signal 4A25 SIG22 Disturbance record signal 4A26 SIG23 Disturbance record signal 4A27 SIG24 Disturbance record signal 4A28 SIG25 Disturbance record signal 4A29 SIG26 Disturbance record signal 4A2A SIG27 Disturbance record signal 4A2B SIG28 Disturbance record signal 4A2C SIG29 Disturbance record signal

342

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4A2D SIG30 Disturbance record signal 4A2E SIG31 Disturbance record signal 4A2F SIG32 Disturbance record signal

Setting Group (Menu) Address Name Contents

Counter

49EB TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable 49EC CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable 49ED TCAEN Trip Count Alarm Enable 49EE ΣIyAEN ΣIy Alarm Enable 49EF OPTAEN Operate Time Alarm Enable 49F0 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting 49F1 ΣIyALM ΣIy Alarm setting 49F2 YVALUE Y value setting forΣIy alarm 49F3 OPTALM Operating Time Alarm Threshold setting

Status

4C40 Display Metering 4C41 Power Metering 4C42 Current Metering 4C48 Time sync. Time synchronization method 4C49 GMT GMT hour 4C4A GMTm GMT minite

Setting Group


Binary Input

4D54 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2 4D55 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-18 4D68 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay 4D69 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay 4D40 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense 4D6A BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay 4D6B BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay 4D41 BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense 4D6C BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay 4D6D BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay 4D42 BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense 4D6E BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay 4D6F BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay 4D43 BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense 4D70 BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay 4D71 BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay 4D44 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense 4D72 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay 4D73 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay 4D45 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense 4D74 BI7 BI7PUD Binary Input 7 Pick-up delay 4D75 BI7 BI7DOD Binary Input 7 Drop-off delay 4D46 BI7 BI7SNS Binary Input 7 Sense 4D76 BI8 BI8PUD Binary Input 8 Pick-up delay 4D77 BI8 BI8DOD Binary Input 8 Drop-off delay 4D47 BI8 BI8SNS Binary Input 8 Sense 4D78 BI9 BI9PUD Binary Input 9 Pick-up delay 4D79 BI9 BI9DOD Binary Input 9 Drop-off delay 4D48 BI9 BI9SNS Binary Input 9 Sense

343

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

4D7A BI10 BI10PUD Binary Input 10 Pick-up delay 4D7B BI10 BI10DOD Binary Input 10 Drop-off delay 4D49 BI10 BI10SNS Binary Input 10 Sense 4D7C BI11 BI11PUD Binary Input 11 Pick-up delay 4D7D BI11 BI11DOD Binary Input 11 Drop-off delay 4D4A BI11 BI11SNS Binary Input 11 Sense 4D7E BI12 BI12PUD Binary Input 12 Pick-up delay 4D7F BI12 BI12DOD Binary Input 12 Drop-off delay 4D4B BI12 BI12SNS Binary Input 12 Sense 4D80 BI13 BI13PUD Binary Input 13 Pick-up delay 4D81 BI13 BI13DOD Binary Input 13 Drop-off delay 4D4C BI13 BI13SNS Binary Input 13 Sense 4D82 BI14 BI14PUD Binary Input 14 Pick-up delay 4D83 BI14 BI14DOD Binary Input 14 Drop-off delay 4D4D BI14 BI14SNS Binary Input 14 Sense 4D84 BI15 BI15PUD Binary Input 15 Pick-up delay 4D85 BI15 BI15DOD Binary Input 15 Drop-off delay 4D4E BI15 BI15SNS Binary Input 15 Sense 4D86 BI16 BI16PUD Binary Input 16 Pick-up delay 4D87 BI16 BI16DOD Binary Input 16 Drop-off delay 4D4F BI16 BI16SNS Binary Input 16 Sense 4D88 BI17 BI17PUD Binary Input 17 Pick-up delay 4D89 BI17 BI17DOD Binary Input 17 Drop-off delay 4D50 BI17 BI17SNS Binary Input 17 Sense 4D8A BI18 BI18PUD Binary Input 18 Pick-up delay 4D8B BI18 BI18DOD Binary Input 18 Drop-off delay 4D51 BI18 BI18SNS Binary Input 18 Sense

344

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Binary Output

4EC2 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EC3 BO1 Reset Reset operation 4E40 BO1 In #1 Functions 4E41 BO1 In #2 Functions 4E42 BO1 In #3 Functions 4E43 BO1 In #4 Functions 4E44 BO1 In #5 Functions 4E45 BO1 In #6 Functions 4E46 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EC4 BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EC5 BO2 Reset Reset operation 4E48 BO2 In #1 Functions 4E49 BO2 In #2 Functions 4E4A BO2 In #3 Functions 4E4B BO2 In #4 Functions 4E4C BO2 In #5 Functions 4E4D BO2 In #6 Functions 4E4E BO2 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EC6 BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EC7 BO3 Reset Reset operation 4E50 BO3 In #1 Functions 4E51 BO3 In #2 Functions 4E52 BO3 In #3 Functions 4E53 BO3 In #4 Functions 4E54 BO3 In #5 Functions 4E55 BO3 In #6 Functions 4E56 BO3 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EC8 BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EC9 BO4 Reset Reset operation 4E58 BO4 In #1 Functions 4E59 BO4 In #2 Functions 4E5A BO4 In #3 Functions 4E5B BO4 In #4 Functions 4E5C BO4 In #5 Functions 4E5D BO4 In #6 Functions 4E5E BO4 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ECA BO5 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ECB BO5 Reset Reset operation 4E60 BO5 In #1 Functions 4E61 BO5 In #2 Functions 4E62 BO5 In #3 Functions 4E63 BO5 In #4 Functions 4E64 BO5 In #5 Functions 4E65 BO5 In #6 Functions 4E66 BO5 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ECC BO6 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ECD BO6 Reset Reset operation 4E68 BO6 In #1 Functions 4E69 BO6 In #2 Functions 4E6A BO6 In #3 Functions

345

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


4E6B BO6 In #4 Functions 4E6C BO6 In #5 Functions 4E6D BO6 In #6 Functions 4E6E BO6 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ECE BO7 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ECF BO7 Reset Reset operation 4E70 BO7 In #1 Functions 4E71 BO7 In #2 Functions 4E72 BO7 In #3 Functions 4E73 BO7 In #4 Functions 4E74 BO7 In #5 Functions 4E75 BO7 In #6 Functions 4E76 BO7 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ED0 BO8 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ED1 BO8 Reset Reset operation 4E78 BO8 In #1 Functions 4E79 BO8 In #2 Functions 4E7A BO8 In #3 Functions 4E7B BO8 In #4 Functions 4E7C BO8 In #5 Functions 4E7D BO8 In #6 Functions 4E7E BO8 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ED2 BO9 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ED3 BO9 Reset Reset operation 4E80 BO9 In #1 Functions 4E81 BO9 In #2 Functions 4E82 BO9 In #3 Functions 4E83 BO9 In #4 Functions 4E84 BO9 In #5 Functions 4E85 BO9 In #6 Functions 4E86 BO9 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ED4 BO10 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ED5 BO10 Reset Reset operation 4E88 BO10 In #1 Functions 4E89 BO10 In #2 Functions 4E8A BO10 In #3 Functions 4E8B BO10 In #4 Functions 4E8C BO10 In #5 Functions 4E8D BO10 In #6 Functions 4E8E BO10 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ED6 BO11 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ED7 BO11 Reset Reset operation 4E90 BO11 In #1 Functions 4E91 BO11 In #2 Functions 4E92 BO11 In #3 Functions 4E93 BO11 In #4 Functions 4E94 BO11 In #5 Functions 4E95 BO11 In #6 Functions 4E96 BO11 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4ED8 BO12 Logic Logic Gate Type 4ED9 BO12 Reset Reset operation 4E98 BO12 In #1 Functions

346

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


4E99 BO12 In #2 Functions 4E9A BO12 In #3 Functions 4E9B BO12 In #4 Functions 4E9C BO12 In #5 Functions 4E9D BO12 In #6 Functions 4E9E BO12 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EDA BO13 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EDB BO13 Reset Reset operation 4EA0 BO13 In #1 Functions 4EA1 BO13 In #2 Functions 4EA2 BO13 In #3 Functions 4EA3 BO13 In #4 Functions 4EA4 BO13 In #5 Functions 4EA5 BO13 In #6 Functions 4EA6 BO13 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EDC BO14 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EDD BO14 Reset Reset operation 4EA8 BO14 In #1 Functions 4EA9 BO14 In #2 Functions 4EAA BO14 In #3 Functions 4EAB BO14 In #4 Functions 4EAC BO14 In #5 Functions 4EAD BO14 In #6 Functions 4EAE BO14 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EDE BO15 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EDF BO15 Reset Reset operation 4EB0 BO15 In #1 Functions 4EB1 BO15 In #2 Functions 4EB2 BO15 In #3 Functions 4EB3 BO15 In #4 Functions 4EB4 BO15 In #5 Functions 4EB5 BO15 In #6 Functions 4EB6 BO15 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 4EE0 BO16 Logic Logic Gate Type 4EE1 BO16 Reset Reset operation 4EB8 BO16 In #1 Functions 4EB9 BO16 In #2 Functions 4EBA BO16 In #3 Functions 4EBB BO16 In #4 Functions 4EBC BO16 In #5 Functions 4EBD BO16 In #6 Functions 4EBE BO16 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

347

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4


Configurable LED

4DE0 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type 4DE1 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation 4DE2 LED2 Logic LED2 Logic Gate Type 4DE3 LED2 Reset LED2 Reset operation 4DE4 LED3 Logic LED3 Logic Gate Type 4DE5 LED3 Reset LED3 Reset operation 4DE6 LED4 Logic LED4 Logic Gate Type 4DE7 LED4 Reset LED4 Reset operation 4DE8 LED5 Logic LED5 Logic Gate Type 4DE9 LED5 Reset LED5 Reset operation 4DEA LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type 4DEB LED6 Reset LED6 Reset operation 4DC0 LED1 In #1 LED Functions 4DC1 LED1 In #2 LED Functions 4DC2 LED1 In #3 LED Functions 4DC3 LED1 In #4 LED Functions 4DC4 LED2 In #1 LED Functions 4DC5 LED2 In #2 LED Functions 4DC6 LED2 In #3 LED Functions 4DC7 LED2 In #4 LED Functions 4DC8 LED3 In #1 LED Functions 4DC9 LED3 In #2 LED Functions 4DCA LED3 In #3 LED Functions 4DCB LED3 In #4 LED Functions 4DCC LED4 In #1 LED Functions 4DCD LED4 In #2 LED Functions 4DCE LED4 In #3 LED Functions 4DCF LED4 In #4 LED Functions 4DD0 LED5 In #1 LED Functions 4DD1 LED5 In #2 LED Functions 4DD2 LED5 In #3 LED Functions 4DD3 LED5 In #4 LED Functions 4DD4 LED6 In #1 LED Functions 4DD5 LED6 In #2 LED Functions 4DD6 LED6 In #3 LED Functions 4DD7 LED6 In #4 LED Functions 4E00 LED1 Color LED Color 4E01 LED2 Color LED Color 4E02 LED3 Color LED Color 4E03 LED4 Color LED Color 4E04 LED5 Color LED Color 4E05 LED6 Color LED Color

348

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting Group


Configurable LED

4E10 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation 4E11 IND2 Reset IND2 Reset operation 4DF0 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED 4DF1 IND1 BIT2 Virtual LED 4DF2 IND1 BIT3 Virtual LED 4DF3 IND1 BIT4 Virtual LED 4DF4 IND1 BIT5 Virtual LED 4DF5 IND1 BIT6 Virtual LED 4DF6 IND1 BIT7 Virtual LED 4DF7 IND1 BIT8 Virtual LED 4DF8 IND2 BIT1 Virtual LED 4DF9 IND2 BIT2 Virtual LED 4DFA IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED 4DFB IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED 4DFC IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED 4DFD IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED 4DFE IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED 4DFF IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED


Active group/ Common

4CC0 Active gp. Active setting group 4CC1 APPLCT Application setting of CT 4CCA APPLVT Application setting of VT 4CC2 APPLVE Application setting of EVT 4CCC CT1 CT1 Rating 4CCE CT1POL CT1 Polarity 4CCF CT2POL CT2 Polarity 4CD1 CTn1 CTn1 Rating 4CD4 MOTEN Motor protection function Enable

4CC7 CT1SVEN CT1 AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable

4CD3 CT2SVEN CT2 AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable

4CC8 V0SVEN EVT AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable

4CC9 V2SVEN VT AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable

4CCB AOLED ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output

48D0 4900 1CT CT1 ratio 48D1 4901 2CT CT2 ratio 48D2 4902 1nCT CT1n ratio 48D6 4906 PVT VT ratio 48D7 4907 VEVT EVT ratio

349

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Setting Group (Menu)

Address Name Contents

Protection

42C7 4387 DIF DIFEN DIF Enable 42C7 4387 DIF HOCEN HOC Enable 42C8 4388 DIF DIFTEN DIF1 Enable 42C9 4389 DIF DIFTPMD DIF trip mode 42C9 4389 DIF 2f-lock 2f restraint 42CA 438A DIF 5f-lock 5f restraint 42CB 438B DIF CTSEN CTS Enable(HS) 42D2 4392 OC OC1EN OC1Enable 42D3 4393 OC OC1-DIR OC1 Direction 42D5 4395 OC MOC1C-IEC OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type 42D6 4396 OC MOC1C-IEEE OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 42D6 4396 OC MOC1C-US OC1 US Inverse Curve Type 42D7 4397 OC OC1R OC1 Reset Characteristic 42D7 4397 OC OC1-2F OC1 2f Block Enable 42D8 4398 OC OC2EN OC2Enable 42D9 4399 OC OC2-DIR OC2 Direction 42DB 439B OC MOC2C-IEC OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type 42DC 439C OC MOC2C-IEEE OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 42DC 439C OC MOC2C-US OC2 US Inverse Curve Type 42DD 439D OC OC2R OC2 Reset Characteristic 42DD 439D OC OC2-2F OC2 2f Block Enable 42DE 439E OC OC3EN OC3 Enable 42DF 439F OC OC3-DIR OC3 Direction 42E3 43A3 OC OC3-2F OC3 2f Block Enable 42E4 43A4 OC OC4EN OC4 Enable 42E5 43A5 OC OC4-DIR OC4 Direction 42E9 43A9 OC OC4-2F OC4 2f Block Enable 433B 43FB OC OCTP OC trip mode 42EA 43AA EF EF1EN EF1 Enable 42EB 43AB EF EF1-DIR EF1 Direction 42ED 43AD EF MEF1C-IEC EFI1 IEC Inverse Curve Type 42EE 43AE EF MEF1C-IEEE EFI1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 42EE 43AE EF MEF1C-US EFI1 US Inverse Curve Type 42EF 43AF EF EF1R EFI1 Reset Characteristic 42EF 43AF EF EF1-2F EF1 2f Block Enable 42F0 43B0 EF EF2EN EF2 Enable 42F1 43B1 EF EF2-DIR EF2 Direction 42F3 43B3 EF MEF2C-IEC EFI2 IEC Inverse Curve Type 42F4 43B4 EF MEF2C-IEEE EFI2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 42F4 43B4 EF MEF2C-US EFI2 US Inverse Curve Type 42F5 43B5 EF EF2R EFI2 Reset Characteristic 42F5 43B5 EF EF2-2F EF2 2f Block Enable 42F6 43B6 EF EF3EN EF3 Enable 42F7 43B7 EF EF3-DIR EF3 Direction 42FB 43BB EF EF3-2F EF3 2f Block Enable 42FC 43BC EF EF4EN EF4 Enable 42FD 43BD EF EF4-DIR EF4 Direction 4301 43C1 EF EF4-2F EF4 2f Block Enable 4302 43C2 SEF SE1EN SEF1 Enable 4303 43C3 SEF SE1-DIR SEF1 Direction

350

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



4303 43C3 SEF MSE1C-IEC SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type 4304 43C4 SEF MSE1C-IEEE SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 4304 43C4 SEF MSE1C-US SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type 4305 43C5 SEF SE1R SEF1 Reset Characteristic 4305 43C5 SEF SE1S2 SEF1-2 Enable 4306 43C6 SEF SE1-2F SEF1 2f Block Enable 4307 43C7 SEF SE2EN SEF2 Enable 4307 43C7 SEF SE2-DIR SEF2 Direction 4308 43C8 SEF MSE2C-IEC SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type 4308 43C8 SEF MSE2C-IEEE SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 4309 43C9 SEF MSE2C-US SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type 4309 43C9 SEF SE2R SEF2 Reset Characteristic 430A 43CA SEF SE2-2F SEF2 2f Block Enable 430B 43CB SEF SE3EN SEF3 Enable 430B 43CB SEF SE3-DIR SEF3 Direction 430C 43CC SEF SE3-2F SEF3 2f Block Enable 430D 43CD SEF SE4EN SEF4 Enable 430D 43CD SEF SE4-DIR SEF4 Direction 430E 43CE SEF SE4-2F SEF4 2f Block Enable 430F 43CF SEF ZPEN SEF4 2f Block Enable 4359 4419 Moter EXSTEN Start Protection Enable 435A 441A Moter STRTEN 50S Enable 435A 441A Moter LKRTEN Locked Rotor Enable 435B 441B Moter RSIHEN Restart Inhibit Protection Enable 435B 441B Moter STPHEN Starts per hour Enable 430F 43CF NOC NC1EN 1NC1 Enable 4312 43D2 NOC MNC1C-IEC 1NC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type 4313 43D3 NOC MNC1C-IEEE 1NC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 4313 43D3 NOC MNC1C-US 1NC1 US Inverse Curve Type 4314 43D4 NOC NC1R 1NC1 Reset Characteristic 4314 43D4 NOC NC1-2F 1NC1 2f Block Enable 4315 43D5 NOC NC2EN 1NC2 Enable 4318 43D8 NOC MNC2C-IEC 1NC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type 4319 43D9 NOC MNC2C-IEEE 1NC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 4319 43D9 NOC MNC2C-US 1NC2 US Inverse Curve Type 431A 43DA NOC NC2R 1NC2 Reset Characteristic 431A 43DA NOC NC2-2F 1NC2 2f Block Enable 4361 4421 Misc LOFEN 433C 43FC Misc OCV1EN OCV1 Enable 433D 43FD Misc MOCV1C-IEC OCV1 IEC Inverse Curve Type 433E 43FE Misc MOCV1C-IEEE OCV1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 433E 43FE Misc MOCV1C-US OCV1 US Inverse Curve Type 433F 43FF Misc MOCV1R OCV1 Reset Characteristic 4340 4400 Misc OCV1-2F OCV1 2f Block Enable 4341 4401 Misc OCVTP OCV1 trip mode 4344 4404 Misc OCV2EN OCV2 Enable 4344 4404 Misc MOCV2C-IEC OCV2 IEC Inverse Curve Type 4345 4405 Misc MOCV2C-IEEE OCV2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type 4345 4405 Misc MOCV2C-US OCV2 US Inverse Curve Type 4346 4406 Misc MOCV2R OCV2 Reset Characteristic 4346 4406 Misc OCV2-2F OCV2 2f Block Enable

351

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



434E 440E Misc UC1EN UC1 Enable 434F 440F Misc UC2EN UC2 Enable 4329 43E9 Misc THMEN Thermal OL Enable 432A 43EA Misc THMAEN Thermal Alarm Enable 4361 4421 Misc THM-Ieq Thermal current setting 432A 43EA Misc BTC Back-trip control 432B 43EB Misc RTC Re-trip control 434F 440F Misc RPCB CB condition use 4350 4410 Misc RP-UVBLK UV Block Enable 4350 4410 Misc RP-Power Power Direction Enable 4351 4411 Misc Power Power Direction 4351 4411 Misc RP1EN Reverse Power1 Enable 4352 4412 Misc RP1-2F 2f Block Enable 4352 4412 Misc RP2EN Reverse Power2 Enable 4353 4413 Misc RP2-2F 2f Block Enable 4360 4420 Misc MJAEN Mechanical Jam alarm Enable 4360 4420 Misc MJEN Mechanical Jam Enable 432B 43EB OV OV1EN OV1 Enable 432C 43EC OV OV2EN OV2 Enable 4353 4413 OV OV3EN OV3 Enable 4354 4414 OV OV4EN OV4 Enable 432C 43EC UV UV1EN UV1 Enable 432D 43ED UV UV2EN UV2 Enable 4354 4414 UV UV3EN UV3 Enable 4355 4415 UV UV4EN UV4 Enable 432E 43EE UV VBLKEN UV Block Enable 4355 4415 ZOV ZOV1EN ZOV1 Enable 4356 4416 ZOV ZOV2EN ZOV2 Enable 4356 4416 NOV NOV1EN NOV1 Enable 4357 4417 NOV NOV2EN NOV2 Enable 432F 43EF FRQ FRQ1EN FRQ1 Enable 432F 43EF FRQ FRQ2EN FRQ2 Enable 4357 4417 FRQ FRQ3EN FRQ1 Enable 4358 4418 FRQ FRQ4EN FRQ2 Enable 4330 43F0 DFRQ DFRQ1EN DFRQ1 Enable 4330 43F0 DFRQ DFRQ2EN DFRQ2 Enable 4358 4418 DFRQ DFRQ3EN DFRQ1 Enable 4359 4419 DFRQ DFRQ4EN DFRQ2 Enable 4540 46C0 DIF ik Minimum operating current 4541 46C1 DIF p1 % slope of small current region 4542 46C2 DIF p2 % slope of large current region 4543 46C3 DIF kp Break point of DIF characteristic 4544 46C4 DIF kh hige-set current 461B 479B DIF k2f 2f restraint 461C 479C DIF k5f 5f restraint 4466 44E6 DIF TDIF DIF Definite time setting 4467 44E7 DIF TDIFHS DIFHS Definite time setting 4626 47A6 OC OCTH OC Characteristic Angle 4566 46E6 OC OC1 OC1 Threshold setting 4440 44C0 OC TOC1 OC1 Definite time setting 4568 46E8 OC TOC1M OC1 Time multiplier setting

352

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



4569 46E9 OC TOC1R OC1 Definite time reset delay 456A 46EA OC TOC1RM OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 456B 46EB OC OC1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1 456C 46EC OC OC1-a ditto 456D 46ED OC OC1-C ditto 456E 46EE OC OC1-kr ditto 456F 46EF OC OC1-b ditto 4570 46F0 OC OC2 OC2 Threshold setting 4441 44C1 OC TOC2 OC2 Definite time setting 4572 46F2 OC TOC2M OC2 Time multiplier setting 4573 46F3 OC TOC2R OC2 Definite time reset delay 4574 46F4 OC TOC2RM OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 4575 46F5 OC OC2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2 4576 46F6 OC OC2-a ditto 4577 46F7 OC OC2-C ditto 4578 46F8 OC OC2-kr ditto 4579 46F9 OC OC2-b ditto 457A 46FA OC OC3 OC3 Threshold setting 4442 44C2 OC TOC3 OC3 Definite time setting 4584 4704 OC OC4 OC4 Threshold setting 4443 44C3 OC TOC4 OC4 Definite time setting 4627 47A7 EF EFTH EF Characteristic Angle 45B6 4736 EF EFV EF ZPS voltage level 458E 470E EF EF1 EF1 Threshold setting 4444 44C4 EF TEF1 EF1 EFinite time setting 4590 4710 EF TEF1M EF1 Time multiplier setting 4591 4711 EF TEF1R EF1 EFinite time reset delay 4592 4712 EF TEF1RM EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 4593 4713 EF EF1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1 4594 4714 EF EF1-a ditto 4595 4715 EF EF1-C ditto 4596 4716 EF EF1-kr ditto 4597 4717 EF EF1-b ditto 4598 4718 EF EF2 EF2 Threshold setting 4445 44C5 EF TEF2 EF2 EFinite time setting 459A 471A EF TEF2M EF2 Time multiplier setting 459B 471B EF TEF2R EF2 EFinite time reset delay 459C 471C EF TEF2RM EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 459D 471D EF EF2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2 459E 471E EF EF2-a ditto 459F 471F EF EF2-C ditto 45A0 4720 EF EF2-kr ditto 45A1 4721 EF EF2-b ditto 45A2 4722 EF EF3 EF3 Threshold setting 4446 44C6 EF TEF3 EF3 EFinite time setting 45AC 472C EF EF4 EF4 Threshold setting 4447 44C7 EF TEF4 EF4 EFinite time setting 45AF 472F SEF SETH SEF Characteristic Angle 45B0 4730 SEF SEV SEF ZPS voltage level 45B1 4731 SEF SE1 SEF1 Threshold setting 4448 44C8 SEF TSE1 SEF1 Definite time setting

353

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



45B2 4732 SEF TSE1M SEF1 Time multiplier setting 45B3 4733 SEF TSE1R SEF1 Definite time reset delay 45B4 4734 SEF TSE1RM SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 4449 44C9 SEF TS1S2 SEF1 Stage 2 definite timer settings 4675 47F5 SEF SE1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1 4676 47F6 SEF SE1-a ditto 4677 47F7 SEF SE1-C ditto 4678 47F8 SEF SE1-kr ditto 4679 47F9 SEF SE1-b ditto 45B5 4735 SEF SE2 SEF2 Threshold setting 444A 44CA SEF TSE2 SEF2 Definite time setting 4670 47F0 SEF TSE2M SEF2 Time multiplier setting 4671 47F1 SEF TSE2R SEF2 Definite time reset delay 45B8 4738 SEF TSE2RM SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 467A 47FA SEF SE2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2 45C2 4742 SEF SE2-a ditto 467B 47FB SEF SE2-C ditto 467C 47FC SEF SE2-kr ditto 467D 47FD SEF SE2-b ditto 4672 47F2 SEF SE3 SEF3 Threshold setting 444B 44CB SEF TSE3 SEF3 Definite time setting 4673 47F3 SEF SE4 SEF4 Threshold setting 444C 44CC SEF TSE4 SEF4 Definite time setting 4674 47F4 SEF ZP Residual Power Threshold 45B7 4737 NOC NC1 NOC1 Threshold setting 444D 44CD NOC TNC1 NOC1 Definite time setting 45B9 4739 NOC TNC1M NOC1 Time multiplier setting 45BA 473A NOC TNC1R NOC1 Definite time reset delay 45BB 473B NOC TNC1RM NOC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 45BC 473C NOC NC1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC1 45BD 473D NOC NC1-a ditto 45BE 473E NOC NC1-C ditto 45BF 473F NOC NC1-kr ditto 45C0 4740 NOC NC1-b ditto 45C1 4741 NOC NC2 NOC2 Threshold setting 444E 44CE NOC TNC2 NOC2 Definite time setting 45C3 4743 NOC TNC2M NOC2 Time multiplier setting 45C4 4744 NOC TNC2R NOC2 Definite time reset delay 45C5 4745 NOC TNC2RM NOC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 45C6 4746 NOC NC2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC2 45C7 4747 NOC NC2-a ditto 45C8 4748 NOC NC2-C ditto 45C9 4749 NOC NC2-kr ditto 45CA 474A NOC NC2-b ditto 4628 47A8 Motor IMOT Motor rated current 4629 47A9 Motor TEXST Motor Start Pro. Time. 462A 47AA Motor TMTST Motor Start_up Time. 462B 47AB Motor STRT 50S Threshold setting 446C 44EC Motor TSTRT 50S Definite time setting. 462C 47AC Motor LKRTIS Motor Start Current. 462D 47AD Motor TLKRT Rotor Restraint Time.

354

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



462E 47AE Motor RTTHM Rotor Permissible Heat Range. 462F 47AF Motor LIMNUM limit number for Starts per hour 468F 480F Misc Z0 LOF setting 4690 4810 Misc ZG LOF setting 448C 450C Misc TLOF LOF timer setting 45EB 476B Misc OCV1 OCV1 Threshold setting 461E 479E Misc OCV1IS OCV1 Threshold setting 4620 47A0 Misc TOCV1M OCV1 Time multiplier setting 4621 47A1 Misc TOCV1R OCV1 Definite time reset delay 4622 47A2 Misc TOCV1RM OCV1 Dependent time reset time multiplier 4623 47A3 Misc OCV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OCV1 4624 47A4 Misc OCV1-a ditto 4625 47A5 Misc OCV1-C ditto 45F1 4771 Misc OCV1-kr ditto 4618 4798 Misc OCV1-b ditto 4630 47B0 Misc OCV2 OCV2 Threshold setting 4631 47B1 Misc OCV2IS OCV2 Threshold setting 4632 47B2 Misc TOCV2M OCV2 Time multiplier setting 4633 47B3 Misc TOCV2R OCV2 Definite time reset delay 4634 47B4 Misc TOCV2RM OCV2 Dependent time reset time multiplier 4635 47B5 Misc OCV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OCV2 4636 47B6 Misc OCV2-a ditto 4637 47B7 Misc OCV2-C ditto 4638 47B8 Misc OCV2-kr ditto 4639 47B9 Misc OCV2-b ditto 467E 47FE Misc UC1 UC1 Threshold setting 4477 44F7 Misc TUC1 UC1 Definite time setting 467F 47FF Misc UC2 UC2 Threshold setting 447A 44FA Misc TUC2 UC2 Definite time setting 45EC 476C Misc THM Thermal overload setting 45ED 476D Misc THMIP Pre Current value 4692 4812 Misc THMQ Thermal unbalance factor 45EE 476E Misc TTHM Thermal Time Constant 4691 4811 Misc TTHM2 Thermal Time2 Constant 45EF 476F Misc THMA Thermal alarm setting 45F0 4770 Misc ICD-2f Sensitivity of 2f 45F2 4772 Misc ICDOC Threshold of fundamental current 45F3 4773 Misc CBF CBF Threshold setting 445E 44DE Misc TBTC Back trip Definite time setting 445F 44DF Misc TRTC Re-trip Definite time setting 4680 4800 Misc RP1 Reverse Power Threshold setting 4681 4801 Misc RP1DPR Reverse Power DO/PU ratio 447D 44FD Misc TRP1 Reverse Power Definite time setting 447E 44FE Misc TCBRP1 wait time after CB closeing 4682 4802 Misc RP2 Reverse Power Threshold setting 4683 4803 Misc RP2DPR Reverse Power DO/PU ratio 447F 44FF Misc TRP2 Reverse Power Definite time setting 4480 4500 Misc TCBRP2 wait time after CB closeing 4684 4804 Misc RPVBLK UV Blocking threshold 468D 480D Misc MJA Mechanical Jam alar, threshold 468E 480E Misc MJ Mechanical Jam threshold

355

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



4489 4509 Misc TMJA Mechanical Jam alarm time setting 448A 450A Misc TMJ Mehacnical Jam time setting 448B 450B Misc TBLMJ Mechanical Jam Block timer setting 45F4 4774 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting 4451 44D1 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting 45F5 4775 OV TOV1M OV1 Time multiplier setting 45F6 4776 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay 45F7 4777 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio 45F8 4778 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 45F9 4779 OV OV1-a ditto 45FA 477A OV OV1-C ditto 45FB 477B OV OV2 OV2 Threshold setting 4460 44E0 OV TOV2 OV2 Definite time setting 45FC 477C OV TOV2M OV2 Time multiplier setting 45FD 477D OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay 45FE 477E OV OV2DPR OV2 DO/PU ratio 45FF 477F OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 4600 4780 OV OV2-a OV2 Definite time setting 4601 4781 OV OV2-C OV2 Time multiplier setting 464E 47CE OV OV3 OV3 Threshold setting 446D 44ED OV TOV3 OV3 Definite time setting 464F 47CF OV OV3DPR OV3 DO/PU ratio 4650 47D0 OV OV4 OV4 Threshold setting 446E 44EE OV TOV4 OV4 Definite time setting 4651 47D1 OV OV4DPR OV4 DO/PU ratio 4602 4782 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting 4453 44D3 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting 4603 4783 UV TUV1M UV1 Time multiplier setting 4604 4784 UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay 4605 4785 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4606 4786 UV UV1-a ditto 4607 4787 UV UV1-C ditto 4608 4788 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting 4461 44E1 UV TUV2 UV2 Definite time setting 4609 4789 UV TUV2M UV2 Time multiplier setting 460A 478A UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay 460B 478B UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 460C 478C UV UV2-a ditto 460D 478D UV UV2-C ditto 4652 47D2 UV UV3 UV3 Threshold setting 446F 44EF UV TUV3 UV3 Definite time setting 4653 47D3 UV UV4 UV4 Threshold setting 4470 44F0 UV TUV4 UV4 Definite time setting 460E 478E UV VBLK UV Blocking threshold 4654 47D4 ZOV ZOV1 ZOV1 Threshold setting 4471 44F1 ZOV TZOV1 ZOV1 Definite time setting 4655 47D5 ZOV TZOV1M ZOV1 Time multiplier setting 4656 47D6 ZOV TZOV1R ZOV1 Definite time reset delay 4657 47D7 ZOV ZOV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV1 4658 47D8 ZOV ZOV1-a ditto 4659 47D9 ZOV ZOV1-C ditto

356

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4



465A 47DA ZOV ZOV2 ZOV2 Threshold setting 4472 44F2 ZOV TZOV2 ZOV2 Definite time setting 465B 47DB ZOV TZOV2M ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 465C 47DC ZOV TZOV2R ZOV2 Definite time reset delay 465D 47DD ZOV ZOV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZOV2 465E 47DE ZOV ZOV2-a ZOV2 Definite time setting 465F 47DF ZOV ZOV2-C ZOV2 Time multiplier setting 4660 47E0 NOV NOV1 NOV1 Threshold setting 4473 44F3 NOV TNOV1 NOV1 Definite time setting 4661 47E1 NOV TNOV1M NOV1 Time multiplier setting 4662 47E2 NOV TNOV1R NOV1 Definite time reset delay 4663 47E3 NOV NOV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV1 4664 47E4 NOV NOV1-a ditto 4665 47E5 NOV NOV1-C ditto 4666 47E6 NOV NOV2 NOV2 Threshold setting 4474 44F4 NOV TNOV2 NOV2 Definite time setting 4667 47E7 NOV TNOV2M NOV2 Time multiplier setting 4668 47E8 NOV TNOV2R NOV2 Definite time reset delay 4669 47E9 NOV NOV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOV2 466A 47EA NOV NOV2-a NOV2 Definite time setting 466B 47EB NOV NOV2-C NOV2 Time multiplier setting 460F 478F FRQ FRQ1 FRQ1 Threshold setting 4455 44D5 FRQ TFRQ1 FRQ1 Definite time setting 4610 4790 FRQ FRQ2 FRQ2 Threshold setting 4456 44D6 FRQ TFRQ2 FRQ2 Definite time setting 466C 47EC FRQ FRQ3 FRQ3 Threshold setting 4475 44F5 FRQ TFRQ3 FRQ3 Definite time setting 466D 47ED FRQ FRQ4 FRQ4 Threshold setting 4476 44F6 FRQ TFRQ4 FRQ4 Definite time setting 4611 4791 FRQ FVBLK UV Blocking threshold 4612 4792 DFRQ DFRQ1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting. 4613 4793 DFRQ DFRQ2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting. 466E 47EE DFRQ DFRQ3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting. 466F 47EF DFRQ DFRQ4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting.

357

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

3. CB remote control

To control the CB at remote site with the Modbus communication, do the following.

･Operation item

- Remote control (CB on / off)

- Change of interlock position

- LED reset

・Operating procedure

To control the CB at remote site with Modbus communication is require the following three steps.

- Pass word authentication

- Enable flag setting for remote control

- Remote control

CAUTION

To control the CB at remote site, set the control hierarchy setting of relay to “Remote”.

A. Pass word authentication

To authenticate the password, enter the password for control function to the address of “3E82” . The password is the same as that of control function.

The password retention is 1 minute.

If no password is set, please enter “0000” as password.

The sending messages transmitted with ASCII code.

Ex. “0000” -> “303030303”

Message example (Relay address:01, Password:0000, need CRC frame)

to relay 01103E8200020430303030

from relay 01103E820002

B. Enable flag setting for remote control

358

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

To enable the remote control, turn on the address of “0200 : Remote control enable flag”.

When the operation completed or time-out occurs, the flag is reset.

Flag state can be checked in the command of “FC=01 Read Coils”.

Message example

to relay 02050200FF00

from relay 02050200FF00

C. Remote control

To control the CB at remote site, turn on or off the address of “0400: Remote control command”, ”0401: Remote interlock command” or “0402: Remote reset command”.

The “On” operation command is “FF00”. The “Off” operation command is “0000”.

The operation reply is checked by the “BO” or “LED” signals according to the relay settings.

Message example (Relay address:01、CB on, need CRC frame)

to relay 01050400FF00

from relay 01050400FF00

Message example (Relay address:01、CB off, need CRC frame)

to relay 010504000000

from relay 010504000000

359

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Appendix N

Ordering

360

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Ordering

Model 300 series

Type: Machine protection Relay GRE170 Model: -Model 300 : 2 x three-phase current inputs and

earth fault+ three-phase voltage inputs - 6 × BIs, 4 × Bos, 1 × Relay fail - 12 × BIs, 10 × Bos, 1×Relay fail - 18 × BIs, 16 × Bos, 1×Relay fail

300 301 302

-Model 320 : 2 x three-phase current inputs and

sensitive earth fault+ three-phase voltage inputs

- 6 × BIs, 4 × Bos, 1 × Relay fail - 12 × BIs, 10 × Bos, 1×Relay fail - 18 × BIs, 16 × Bos, 1×Relay fail

320 321 322

Rating: CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc

1 2 A

Standard and language: IEC (English) ANSI (English) Chinese

0 1 2

Communications: RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)

10

A0

C0

GRE170 A

－

－－

361

6 F 2 T 0 1 9 4

Version-up Records

Version No.

Date Revised Section Contents

0.0 OCT. 2, 2014 -- First issue

362

instruction manual machine protection relay gre170 …€¦ · instruction manual. machine...

Documents